NEC SL1100 Скачать руководство пользователя страница 476 | Manualshive

Страница: 476 / 864

NEC SL1100 Скачать руководство пользователя страница 476

DID Line Service

Program

Number

Program Name/Description

Assigned Data

10-03-20

ISDN Protocol Selection

Assign the protocol that is to be used for the ISDN service.
The setting in the SL1100 MUST match the setting that the Telco has
configured.

0 = Standard
3 = DMS

(A211)

4 = 5ESS
5 = DMS

(A233)

6 = 4ESS
7 = NI2
(default = 7)

22-02-01 *

Incoming Call trunk Setup

Assign all PRI trunks as an incoming type of DID (setting data 3).
This program is per trunk and per day/night mode, which there are 8
day/night modes. It is recommended that all 8 day/night modes be set
as DID.

0 = Normal
1 = VRS
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie Line
6 = Delay VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID (DDI) Mode Switching
(default = 0)

14-05-01

Trunk Group Setup

Assign all PRI trunks, including the D-Channel, to a valid trunk group.
Do not assign any used PRI trunks in trunk group 0.

0 ~ 25
(default = 1)

22-09-01

Expected number of Digits

Enter the number of digits, per the trunk group assigned in PRG
14-05, that the Telco will be sending to the SL1100 as DID's.
The SL1100 will analyze the digits received from the Telco starting
from the last digits working towards the first digits.
Example:
If the SL1100 was set to receive 4 digits and the Telco sent 10 digits
(214-555-1000) the SL1100 would route off of the last 4 digits re-
ceived (1000).

1 ~ 8
(default = 4)

22-13-01

DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment

Per day/night mode a translation area must be assigned to the trunk
group. This will allow for DID's to route to different places in day/night
modes.

0 = No Routing
1 ~ 20 = Table Area

(assigned in

PRG 22-10)

(default = 1)

22-10-01

DID Translation Table Setup

Assign the DID translation tables (in PRG 22-11) that are going to be
used to route the DID digits.

0 = No Routing
1 ~ 800 = Tables 1 ~ 800

(assigned

in PRG 22-11)

(Refer to the programming manual for
the default values of all tables.)

22-11-01 *

Received Number

Enter the digits received from the Telco that are going to be transla-
ted.
The amount of digits entered should be equal to the setting assigned
in PRG 22-09-01.

Maximum of 8 digits

(0 ~ 9,

*

, #)

(default = Not Assigned)

22-11-02 *

Target Number

Enter the destination number to which the DID is to be sent.

Maximum of 8 digits

(0 ~ 9,

*

, #, @)

(default = Not Assigned)

20-09-02 *

Caller ID Display

Per class of service this allows or denies the stations from receiving
the caller ID name/number that the Telco is sending in.

0 = OFF

(Caller ID NOT displayed.)

1 = ON

(Caller ID IS displayed.)

(default = 0)

SL1100

ISSUE 2.0

1-464

ISDN Compatibility

I

«
...
474
475
476
477
478
...
»

Содержание SL1100

Страница 1: ...ormat changes may occur When viewing and printing this document we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics Therefore when you view the document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly ...

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ...Features and Specifications Manual A50 031169 003 NA ISSUE 2 0 ...

Страница 4: ...red trademark of NEC Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation AT T is a registered trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company Lucent Technologies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel Networks Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC Pentium is...

Страница 5: ...all Forwarding 1 83 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 1 93 Call Forwarding Off Premise 1 95 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override 1 103 Call Monitoring 1 105 Call Redirect 1 108 Call Waiting Camp On 1 110 Callback 1 114 Caller ID Call Return 1 117 Caller ID 1 119 Caller ID Flexible Ringing 1 129 Caller ID Shared Logging 1 136 Central Office Calls Answering 1 138 Central Office Calls Placing 1 143 C...

Страница 6: ...nd Monitor 1 301 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 1 303 Headset Operation 1 305 Hold 1 307 Hotel Motel 1 311 Hotel Motel Do Not Disturb 1 318 Hotel Motel DSS Console Monitoring 1 321 Hotel Motel Message Waiting 1 325 Hotel Motel Room Status 1 328 Hotel Motel Room Status Printout 1 333 Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 1 338 Hotel Motel Single Digit Dialing 1 340 Hotel Motel Tol...

Страница 7: ...naling 1 551 One Touch Calling 1 554 Operator 1 557 Paging External 1 559 Paging External VRS 1 562 Paging Internal 1 564 Park 1 567 PBX Compatibility Behind PBX 1 573 PC Programming 1 576 PC Programming Intuition Setup 1 584 Power Failure Transfer 1 602 Prime Line Selection 1 603 Private Line 1 606 Programmable Function Keys 1 609 Programming from a Multiline Terminal 1 612 Pulse to Tone Conversi...

Страница 8: ...icast Paging Mode 1 761 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 766 User Programming Ability 1 771 Virtual Extensions 1 772 Voice Mail Integration Analog 1 777 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys 1 786 Voice Melody Ringing by VM 1 789 Voice Over 1 795 Voice Response System VRS 1 798 Voice Response System VRS Upload Download Audio 1 807 Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page 1 812 V...

Страница 9: ...1 27 InMail Part Number and Capacity 1 362 Table 1 28 InMail Email Account Information 1 394 Table 1 29 Typical SMS Notification No Wav File 1 396 Table 1 30 Typical SMS Notification No Wav File Continued 1 396 Table 1 31 Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings 1 396 Table 1 32 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals 1 396 Table 1 33 Turn Email Notification On or Off 1 399...

Страница 10: ... 1 662 Table 1 65 Intercom or Trunk Ring Setting 1 665 Table 1 66 SMDR Report Definitions 1 708 Table 1 67 SMDR Report Format with PRG 35 02 14 Set to 0 1 709 Table 1 68 SMDR Report Format with PRG 35 02 14 Set to 1 1 710 Table 1 69 SMDR Summary Report 1 711 Table 1 70 Keys for Entering Names 1 721 Table 1 71 WAV Format 1 789 Table 1 72 Default Incoming Ringing Tone 1 808 Table 1 73 Error Messages...

Страница 11: ...tification Flow Chart 3 1 382 Figure 1 24 InMail User Pro Login Diagram 1 413 Figure 1 25 Example NAT Traversal 1 425 Figure 1 26 Keys and Their Functions 1 431 Figure 1 27 Example SIP Terminal 1 450 Figure 1 28 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart 1 476 Figure 1 29 Mobile Extension Layout 1 510 Figure 1 30 Example Callback to Mobile Phone 1 521 Figure 1 31 PC Programming Overview 1 576 Figure 1 3...

Страница 12: ...le 1 761 Figure 1 55 Unicast Mode Example 1 762 Figure 1 56 Auto Mode Example 1 762 Figure 1 57 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing 1 767 Figure 1 58 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing 1 768 Figure 1 59 VRS User Pro Login Diagram 1 808 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 viii Features and Specifications Manual ...

Страница 13: ...CTION 2 IMPORTANT NOTES Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operation with One Touch Keys A Multiline Terminal user can access many features Service Codes e g Service Code 744 sets Call Forward Busy No Answer To streamline the operation of their telephone a Multiline Terminal user can store these codes under One Touch Keys This provides one button operation for almost any feature To find out more turn ...

Страница 14: ... for Trunks The system detects the type of unit trunk or extension and assigns the required extension or trunk ports to the slot The system will use the next available port numbers it will not reserve any SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 2 Features ...

Страница 15: ... the Speed Dial bin name Speaker key to place call The Speaker key and service code 2 operations are not available for any 4 digit Speed Dial System bin number DSS Console Chaining DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to a not an Speed Dialing number stored under a DSS Console key The stored number dials out chains to the initial call This can for example simpl...

Страница 16: ...ARS selects the trunk for the call unless selected by the user A user can implement Speed Dial only if their extension has access to outgoing trunks An extension can have a One Touch Key for Speed Dial operation If you enter a PBX trunk access code in a Speed Dial bin the system automatically inserts a pause after the bin Single Line Terminals can dial only System and Group Speed Dial numbers Toll...

Страница 17: ...ng When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled System Speed Dial Program Number Program Name Description Assigned Data 13 01 01 Speed Dial Auto Outgoing Call Mode Assign if the speed dial bins use trunk group routing or intercom ac cess If the bins are assigned as trunk group routing do not add the trunk ac...

Страница 18: ...n your valid numbering plan in PRG 11 01 01 Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default 753 20 07 04 Class of Service Storing Speed Dial Entries Per class of service PRG 20 06 01 allow or deny the ability to store system or group speed dial entries 0 Off Deny 1 On default 1 11 12 10 Service Code Setup Speed Dialing Assign the service code used for accessing common speed dialing system speed dialing bins The s...

Страница 19: ...ies are assigned the additional data would be two digits 00 99 If more than 100 en tries are assigned the additional data would be three digits 000 999 An example would be 28 001 when this key is pressed the first group speed dial bin is accessed 28 Group Speed Dial Refer to the programming manual for the default values and for all other available options in this command Additional Data for Statio...

Страница 20: ...rs default Not Assigned 11 11 39 Station Speed Dial Number Entry If PRG 15 02 60 is set to a 0 assign the service code used for stor ing station speed dialing name and number These entries will be stor ed in PRG 15 14 The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 11 01 01 Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default 755 Operation To store a Speed Dialing number display telephones on...

Страница 21: ...er key to hang up or repeat steps 3 7 to program another System or Group Speed Dial bin To dial a System Speed Dialing number 1 Go off hook 2 Dial 2 3 Dial the System Speed Dialing Bin Number To dial a System Speed Dialing number by Directory Dialing display telephones only When PRG 15 02 60 0 1 On Hook condition 2 Press Right Cursor key until ABB Common menu appears 3 Press Up Cursor key or Down ...

Страница 22: ...B Group menu appears 3 Press Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to select the destination name 4 Press Speaker key or Lift handset When PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 1 On Hook condition 2 Press Down Cursor key and press 1st character you want to search 3 Press Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to select the destination name 4 Press Enter Cursor key to confirm a name and number 5 Press Speaker key or Lift hands...

Страница 23: ...key 6 Enter the name associated with the Speed Dialing number display telephones only Key for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 ...

Страница 24: ...the System Speed Dialing key Service Code 751 27 To preselect press a line key in step 1 instead of Speaker 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number 0 9 1 Station Speed Dial buffer 1 2 Station Speed Dial buffer 2 0 Station Speed Dial buffer 10 The stored number dials out Unless selected by the user Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call The system may optionally select a specific Tr...

Страница 25: ...h Verified Account Codes the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 800 pre programmed codes If the Account Code is in the list the call goes through If the code dialed is not in the list the system prevents the call Verified Account Codes can have 3 16 digits using the characters 0 9 and During programming you can use wild cards to streamline entering codes into system...

Страница 26: ...nter the Forced Account Code When you use Forced Account Code on only toll calls and you dial a local call you hear a beep The timer set in PRG 21 01 14 is applied to toll calls and local calls Speed Dial System Group Station bins can contain stored Account Codes They can be prevented from being displayed using PRG 20 07 04 To simplify Account Code Entry store the Account Code e g 1234 in a One To...

Страница 27: ...coming Calls Per class of service PRG 20 06 01 this program is used to allow or deny users the ability to enter an account code for incoming calls Account codes for incoming calls are used in conjunction with SMDR for billing purposes 0 Disabled User cannot enter an account code 1 Enabled User can enter an ac count code while on an incoming call default 0 35 05 04 Hiding Account Codes Per class of...

Страница 28: ...ble for Single Line Terminals 1 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 50 2 Dial your Account Code 1 16 digits using 0 9 and If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial shows an character on the telephone display 3 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 50 To enter a Forced Account Code before dialing the outside number If your system has Force...

Страница 29: ...G 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 50 To enter an Account Code for an incoming call This procedure is not available for Single Line Terminals 1 Answer incoming call If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled the following steps dial digits out onto the connected trunk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code 1 16 digits You can enter any code of the proper length 4 Dial To enter a Forced Account Code at a Sing...

Страница 30: ... Contain Account Codes When using the Last Number Redial Save or Repeat Dial features the system does not retain Account Code information To redial any number with these features the user must enter an Account Code If a user enters 12345 203 926 5400 67890 if the Last Number Redial feature is used the system dials the number as 203 926 5400 67890 The 67890 is not treated as an Account Code Conditi...

Страница 31: ...enter ac count codes using this trunk 1 Enabled user can enter account codes using this trunk default 1 35 05 01 Account Code Mode Per class of service PRG 20 06 01 this program is used to setup the account code mode For the Account Code Entry feature setting 1 will be the setting that is used 0 Account Codes Disabled 1 Account Codes Optional This is for the account code entry feature 2 Account Co...

Страница 32: ...can use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes enabled You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming calls This procedure is not available for Single Line Terminals 1 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 code 50 2 Dial your Account Code 1 16 digits using 0 9 and If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial shows an on the telephone display 3 Dial O...

Страница 33: ...digits out to the connected trunk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code You can enter any code of the proper length Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified 4 Dial To enter an Account Code at a Single Line Terminal 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by dialing a code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing on page 1 143 for more information 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Code 1 16 d...

Страница 34: ...ay at the preset time Conditions Single Line Terminals ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds Only a Multiline Terminal user can view what time the Alarm is currently set for Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals Any Station Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 01 06 System Options Alarm...

Страница 35: ...e Line Terminal hang up To silence an alarm 1 At Multiline Terminal press Exit key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset The Single Line Terminal user hears Music on Hold when the handset is lifted To check the programmed alarm time at a Multiline Terminal 1 Press Help key 2 Dial 727 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 The programmed time displays 4 Press Exit key To cancel an alarm 1 At the Multil...

Страница 36: ...leshooting easy when IP packets are not sent Alarm Report The Alarm Reports indicate System start up upgrade date and time Unit communication error with date and time and the restoration date and time Date and time a unit was removed from the system Date and time an extension was disconnected from the system Date and time of any system data change Table 1 3 Sample Alarm Report Alarm Report 05 16 2...

Страница 37: ...nitions Alarm Report Heading Definitions LVL Alarm Type MAJ Major MIN Minor NO Number of Alarm 4 digit STAT Status REC Recovered ERR Error WAR Warning DATE Date the Alarm Occurred TIME Time the Alarm Occurred ITEM Name of the Alarm UNIT Name of the Unit SLT KSU Slot Number PRT KSU Port Number PARAMETER Related Information Table 1 5 Alarm Report Item Definitions Item Name Definition PKG Installatio...

Страница 38: ...none none Not Install Slot 3 Information of 000E Shows as None 4 1 4 408M none Running Slot 4 Information of 408E 008E COIU 9 12 Running Slot 4 Information of 408E SUB SLOT COI HBIU 17 24 Running Slot 4 Information of 408E SUB SLOT HBI none none Not Install Slot 2 Information 2 of 408E SUB SLOT HBI 1 2 1 2 none none Not Install Slot 2 Information of PRI BRI 3 1 3 BRIU 13 16 Running Slot 3 Informat...

Страница 39: ...formation of EXIFE3 408M none none Not Install Slot 13 Information of EXIFE3 408M SUB SLOT COI 4 HBIU 41 48 Running Slot 13 Information of EXIFE3 408M SUB SLOT HBI none none Not Install Slot 13 Information of EXIFE3 408M SUB SLOT HBI 1 14 4 2 none none Not Install Slot 14 Information of EXIFE3 Slot 2 408E 008E 000E 15 4 3 none none Not Install Slot 15 Information of EXIFE3 Slot 3 408E 008E 000E 16...

Страница 40: ... case of the PRG 47 18 SMTP client attaches an alarm report to an email as a text file and notifies MEMDB InMailCF mounting is required PRG 47 18 Set to SMTP server setting Outside E mail service is necessary PRG 90 11 14 Set YES to use PRG 47 18 SMTP client In case of No uses a PRG90 11 SMTP client PRG 90 11 15 Set YES to transmit DIMLAST DIMDUMP PRG 90 11 14 YES PRG 47 18 SMTP Client uses is nec...

Страница 41: ...Time Setup Day 00 90 24 03 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Hour 00 90 24 04 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Minute 00 Printing Reports Program Num ber Program Name Default 90 12 01 System Alarm Output Output Port Type 0 Printing System Information Reports Program Num ber Program Name Default 90 13 01 System Information Output Output Port Type 0 90 13 02 System Information O...

Страница 42: ...the system 0 Off 1 On default 0 47 18 02 InMail SMTP Setup Server Name Sets the SMTP server name If the DNS server setting is not assigned in Program 90 11 11 the IP Address must be used in stead of the name Up to 48 characters default No Setting 47 18 03 InMail SMTP Setup SMTP Port Sets the SMTP server port 0 65535 default 25 47 18 04 InMail SMTP Setup Encryp tion Enable SSL Encryption 0 Off 1 On...

Страница 43: ... POP3 server port 0 65535 default 110 47 19 03 InMail POP3 Setup SSL En cryption Enable SSL encryption 0 Off 1 On default 0 47 19 04 InMail POP3 Setup User Name Set the user name for POP3 authentica tion Up to 48 characters default No Setting 47 19 05 InMail POP3 Setup Password Set the password for POP3 authentica tion Up to 48 characters default No Setting Operation To use this feature at any ter...

Страница 44: ...ephones System Availability Terminals All Display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Clock Calendar Display Time and Date Selectable Display Messaging Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal 678 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup D...

Страница 45: ...ame Default 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Information Display COS 01 15 1 Operation Operation is automatic if enabled in programming ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 33 A ...

Страница 46: ...f 3 External Paging can be used by using Audio Out jack at 084M B1 unit Relay Control 1 KSU has 2 relay ports J7 RY1 2 on 084M B1 unit The System can have a maximum of 6 relay ports These relays can be used for External MOH BGM resource External Speaker or Door Phone control in accordance with PRG 10 61 01 and PRG 10 61 02 setting Conditions Interface Specifications Relay Contacts Maximum Contact ...

Страница 47: ...me Default Note 10 60 01 Audio Port Setup Slot No 0 10 61 01 Relay Type 0 No setting 1 External MOH 2 BGM resource 3 External Speaker 4 Door Phone 10 61 02 Destination Selection In case 10 61 01 is 1 or 2 Not Use In case 10 61 01 is 3 1 3 External Speaker message No In case 10 61 01 is 4 1 6 Door Phone No Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 35 A ...

Страница 48: ...ess Headset Conditions The optional device fits underneath the terminal Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s WHA Wireless Headset Adapter Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 10 03 10 ETU Setup ESIU PKG Setup Bottom Option Information 0 15 05 20 Bottom option Information 0 Operation Depen...

Страница 49: ...links slow green For calls placed in a Park Group by another user the LED blinks slow red The Answer Hold Automatic Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions The Answer Hold Automatic Hold Feature does not function for incoming internal calls CO PBX incoming calls not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group do not activate the Answer Hold feature If the direct trunk appearanc...

Страница 50: ... DISA DIL Override COS 01 15 1 Operation To answer a call on a different line key with a call in progress 1 Receive a CO PBX DID DISA DIL incoming ring The line key LED flashes 2 Press the line key and answer the new call The line key LED goes out The original call is put on hold 3 If additional calls are received press the line key to place the current call on hold and connect to the next call as...

Страница 51: ... not have an appearance for the queued call it waits in line to be answered If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent non programmable system feature Conditions Forwarding when unanswered or busy can occur only at the attendant if there are more than 32 calls in queu...

Страница 52: ...gramming Manual 20 01 01 System Options Operator Access Mode 0 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing COS 01 15 1 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Number 101 24 02 01 System Options for Transfer Busy Transfer 1 Operation None SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 40 Attendant Call Queuing A ...

Страница 53: ... an available agent in the group The trunk that has been waiting the longest and how long it has been waiting For each ACD Group you can set the following conditions The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs ACD Overflow With Announcements ACD offers extensive overflow options for another ACD Group...

Страница 54: ...e of the handset The headset conveniently frees up the user s hands for other work and provides privacy while on the call In addition an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer This allows an agent busy on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up Incoming Call Routing Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups These types of cal...

Страница 55: ... a call This enhanced BLF gives a department manager for example ACD Group monitoring abilities without having to become a supervisor with a DSS Console Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one button calling and Transfer to another extension the Hotline partner Hotline helps co workers that work closely together The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a s...

Страница 56: ... and a call is placed into the ACD queue the telephones of the logged out agents display the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system programming Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle until the time in Program 41 20 03 expires again Feature Available in Program 41 20 01 05 Queue Status Display Yes Queue Sta...

Страница 57: ... out of an ACD Queue a transferred call to the ACD Pilot number recalls immediately back to the transferring party If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue a trunk call directly to the Queue is placed in queue If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue a transferred call to the ACD Pilot number recalls immediately back to the transferring party if no Overflow Destination is setup If all agen...

Страница 58: ...ense SL SYS INACD LIC 2001 CPU Card with MEMDB and PZ VM21 InMail Compact Flash SL VM ADVANCE LIC 1015 For Delay Announcements using InMail Required Software None Related Features Direct Inward Dialing DID InMail Music on Hold Night Service Voice Mail Integration Analog Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 13 01 Service Code Setup for ACD ACD LogIn Log Out for KTS A...

Страница 59: ...y Turn Off or On the ACD Queue Status Display for an exten sion Class of Service Any extension which has this option enabled also hears the queue alarm 0 for COS 01 15 30 05 04 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent Busy 7 On 30 05 05 DSS Console Lamp Table Out of Schedule ACD DSS 0 Off 30 05 06 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent Log Out ACD DSS 5 IL 30 05 07 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent Log In ACD DS...

Страница 60: ...tination and an nouncement message types Delay Announcement func tions are not available for ACD pilot number calls Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options 0 No overflow None 1 Overflow with No Announcement 2 No Overflow with First Announcement Only 3 No Overflow with First Second An nouncements 4 Overflow with First Announcement Only 5 Overflow with First and Second An nouncement 6 Not Us...

Страница 61: ...he message is not played 0 255 default 0 41 11 06 VRS Delay Announcement Tone Kind at Message In terval Input what is heard between the Delay messages 0 Ring Back Tone 1 MOH Tone 2 BGM Source default 0 41 11 07 VRS Delay Announcement ACD Forced Disconnect Time after the 2nd Delay Message Set the time after the last 2nd Delay Message is played before the call is disconnected 0 64800 seconds 0 No Di...

Страница 62: ...17 CTI Operation mode when transfer no login ACD group This program allows CTI Server transfers a trunk call to ACD Pilot number which group has no login agent in 3rd Party CTI 0 Transfer to ACD group 1 Error notice default 0 41 16 01 ACD Threshold Overflow Number of Calls in Queue Define the maximum number of calls allowed in the ACD queue before overflow occurs 0 84 0 No Limitation default 0 41 ...

Страница 63: ...arm time in queue display and causes the optional queue alarm to occur on telephones active on a call logged out or in wrap up 0 64800 seconds default 60 41 20 04 ACD Queue Display Settings ACD Call Waiting Alarm Enable Disable the queue alarm 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On default 0 41 20 05 ACD Queue Display Settings ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time Assign the time the Call Waiting Alarm should sound...

Страница 64: ... Program 11 07 Each ACD Group 1 2 Operation Using the Headset with Automatic Answer for ACD Agents 1 With the multiline terminal in an idle state press Help key 2 Press the HEADSET key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 05 twice The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated To cancel Automatic Headset repeat these steps Transferring Trunk Calls to the ACD Pilot Number 1 While on an outside ca...

Страница 65: ...0 NO Enter 1 to log out The ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key goes out Queue Status Display When Logged Into ACD Group 1 With an idle multiline terminal press the Queue Status Display Programmable Function Key Code 19 The display indicates the number of calls in queue the trunk name and the time the call has been waiting When the Queue Status Display key is pressed the queue status of the extension group is ...

Страница 66: ...m 15 07 01 or SC 752 13 The ACD Rest Mode key lights If the Rest Mode key is pressed while the agent is on an active call the key flashes until the agent hangs up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and dial 658 A fast busy is heard To set Pre Rest Mode while on a call press the hookflash and then dial 658 Press the Hookflash again to return to the outside party Rest Mode begins once the call...

Страница 67: ...rs On Loop Start trunks Automatic Release is only available on incoming calls This feature functions while a call is in progress on hold or in a conference This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress holding or parked When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode Speaker automatically turns off If using the handset the station is set to idle when the handset goes ...

Страница 68: ... 3 RBT 132 3990ms Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse Count Type 1 DT 1 Type 2 BT 1 Type 3 RBT 1 Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 06 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Minimum Time Type 1 DT 9 300ms Type 2 BT 12 390ms Type 3 RBT 25 780ms Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Maximum Time Type 1 DT 0 Type 2 BT 20 630ms Type 3 RBT 40 1230ms Type 4 0 ...

Страница 69: ... call refer to PRG 44 03 Time of Day Selection For routing purposes ARS provides 10 different day selections called Time Schedule Patterns Each Time Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to one of the eight day night modes The Time Schedule Patterns are then assigned to a day of the week Monday Friday Saturday Sunday or Holiday Hierarchical Class of Service Contro...

Страница 70: ...p 3 Group 3 5 2 214 1 Route to trunk group 1 Group 1 4 197 1 Route to trunk group 2 Group 2 4 198 1 Route to trunk group 3 Group 3 3 199 1 Route to trunk group 2 Group 2 2 200 1 Route to trunk group 1 Group 1 1 PRG 12 02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as Time Pattern No PRG 12 02 01 Start Time PRG 12 02 02 End Time PRG 12 02 03 Operation Mode 1 00 00 08 30 2 Night 2 08 30 17 00 1 Day 3 17 00...

Страница 71: ...ically queues for the least costly route The system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset Speed Dialing may bypass ARS routing Set up other options for outgoing calls e g assigned line keys adjust gains ARS access key etc Refer to the Dial Tone Detection feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection ARS does not permit 0 and 011 c...

Страница 72: ...ned Data 11 01 01 System Numbering This is the access code that users will dial to access ARS The trunk access code used to access the ARS routing must be set to type 3 trunk access code 0 Not Assigned 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access Code 4 Special trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 F Route Access 9 Dial Extension Analyze Refer to the programming manual for the default values of all...

Страница 73: ...ARS Dial Treatment for ARS For each dial analysis table a dial treatment table can be selected if digits are to be added or deleted to the call The dial treatments tables are defined in PRG 26 03 01 0 No Dial Treatment Table Added Call will be sent out of the system as dialed 1 15 ARS Treatment tables 1 15 default 0 26 03 01 ARS Dial Treatments If PRG 26 02 05 defined a dial treatment table this p...

Страница 74: ...he F Route specified in PRG 44 05 If the dial analysis table is set to a 0 No Service the dial number will be restricted and not routed out of the system 0 No Service Call Restricted 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access default 0 26 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Additional Data Service Number For each dial analysis table select the F Route Table to be program med in PRG 44 05 that is...

Страница 75: ... to extend this timer to give the users more time in be tween dialing digits 0 64800 seconds default 3 ARS COS Program Number Program Name Description Assigned Data 11 01 01 System Numbering This is the access code that users will dial to access ARS The trunk access code used to access the ARS routing must be set to type 3 trunk access code 0 Not Assigned 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk ...

Страница 76: ...routed out of the system 0 No Service Call Restricted 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access default 0 26 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Additional Data Service Number For each dial analysis table select the trunk group from PRG 14 05 01 or the F Route table to be defined in PRG 44 05 that is to be used for the digits that were dialed PRG 26 02 02 set to Trunk Group 0 Trunk Group 0 Call...

Страница 77: ...d 1 25 Trunk Group 1 25 default 0 44 05 07 ARS Class of Service Only needed if PRG 26 02 03 was set to F Route For each F Route priority an ARS class of service must be assigned The ARS class that is assigned here must match the ARS class that is assigned in PRG 26 02 04 0 No ARS Class Call Restricted 1 16 ARS Class 1 16 default 0 44 05 08 Dial Treatment Only needed if PRG 26 02 03 was set to F Ro...

Страница 78: ...ingle Line Terminal lift the handset You hear normal Intercom dial tone 2 Dial 9 You hear a second stutter dial tone 3 Dial the outside number If you hear another stutter dial tone you must enter your extension ARS Authorization Code SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 66 Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route A ...

Страница 79: ... ringing call or internal paging interrupts Background Music Background Music is not available on Single Line Terminals Refer to Analog Communication Interface ACI for detail settings Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s Externally provided Music Source Related Features Music on Hold Guide to Feature Programming The programs listed be...

Страница 80: ...8 BGM On Off No setting 20 13 30 Background Music Per class of service PRG 20 06 01 this program is used to allow or deny the user s ability to turn background music on and off 0 Deny user cannot control back ground music on their station 1 Allow user can control back ground music on their station default 1 Operation To turn Background Music on or off 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial Service Code d...

Страница 81: ...ties to a telephone conversation such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties Conditions An extension user can barge in on a conference An extension user cannot barge in on an Intercom call if one of the interco...

Страница 82: ...tor COS 01 15 0 20 13 15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate COS 01 15 0 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive COS 01 15 0 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone COS 01 15 1 20 13 32 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Multi ple Barge Ins COS 01 15 0 20 14 11 Class of Se...

Страница 83: ...key and dial the service code default 710 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system automatically places a callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a conference call When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference depending on sy...

Страница 84: ...loss of power just before ETU installation to provide battery backup for System Memory When fully charged the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years You should replace the CPU battery every three years During normal operation the battery is continually recharged using a built in charging circuit from the CPU Battery backup on the CPU does not protect the following Callback Off...

Страница 85: ...Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 90 03 01 Save Data not assigned Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 73 B ...

Страница 86: ...al operation the batteries are continually recharged by a built in charging circuit External Battery Box can be connected to the system to back up the system in the event of commercial power outage Refer to the SL1100 System Hardware Manual for further details Default Settings None System Availability Terminals Not applicable Required Component s CPU Related Features Battery Backup System Memory P...

Страница 87: ...100 Default language is US English Call Routing Mailbox maximum of 8 can be used for Built in Automated Attendant Automated Attendant Operator Assistance feature is not supported Up to two ACD Delay Announcements are supported V1 5 or higher ACD queue depth announcements are not supported when using Embedded VRS for ACD delay Announcement If enabled the first ACD Delay Announcement repeats continu...

Страница 88: ... PRG 15 03 03 VM port to Special PRG 16 02 01 VM port group PRG 22 02 01 4 DIL PRG 22 07 01 Pilot number of VM PRG 45 01 01 Specify VM Dpt group PRG 47 01 17 Start port for InMail Incoming call 1 Incoming call to specified trunk 2 Calling party is connected to Built in Automated Attendant Instruction Menu How to enter Instruction Menu 1 Press Speaker key SC 8 of PRG 11 12 51 Call own mailbox at te...

Страница 89: ...Delete the message 1 Dial 3 Exit from Instruction Menu 1 Dial ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 77 B ...

Страница 90: ...able ports extensions are assigned per extension for CAR key mode or virtual extension VE key mode More than one extension can share a CAR key An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key If multiple CAR SIE VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time the CAR SIE VE key on the lowest Line Key is answered first Default Settings Non...

Страница 91: ... Display Mode When Placing a Call on Virtual Extension Key 1 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions CAR SIE Virtu al Extension Delay Interval 10 seconds 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Class 1 20 07 10 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Pro grammable Function Key Programming Appearance Level COS 01 15 1 20 10 08 Class of...

Страница 92: ... Ring To set for Delayed Ring skip to step 8 7 Dial the Mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold key to set up Delayed Ring OR Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker key SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 ...

Страница 93: ...ls V1 5 or higher Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Alphanumeric Display Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Class 1 20 09 06 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service In coming Time Di...

Страница 94: ...Operation To time your trunk calls 1 Place a trunk call The timer starts automatically SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 82 Call Duration Timer C ...

Страница 95: ...other extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination To redirect calls while a user is at another telephone use Call Forwarding with Follow Me A periodic VRS announcement can remind users that their calls are forwarded Conditions Virtual Extensions can be set to Call Forward PRG 15 02 21 must be set to a 1 to allow the Virtual Extension to place outgoing calls If an extension in ...

Страница 96: ... not set any data Call Forward Both Ring Split does not work to an off premise destination If an IP Terminal has forwarding set and then loses connection it follows the forwarding If an IP Terminal has Busy and No Answer Forwarding set to different locations and it loses connection it follows the Busy Forwarding location When the following are done in sequence Call Forwarding Busy No Answer is set...

Страница 97: ... 10 18 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Off Prem ise Call Forward by Door Box 722 11 11 01 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward All 741 11 11 02 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward Busy 742 11 11 03 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward No Answer 743 11 11 04 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward Busy...

Страница 98: ...de COS 01 15 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing COS 01 15 1 20 11 01 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call For ward All COS 01 15 1 20 11 02 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call For ward When Busy COS 01 15 1 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call For warding When Unanswered COS 01 15 1 20 11 04 Class of Service...

Страница 99: ...s To cancel Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Immediate Service Code default 741 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 10 or SC 751 Key Code 10 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker key or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function key turns off To set Call...

Страница 100: ...n key turns on To cancel Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code default 745 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker key or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function key turns of...

Страница 101: ...nation Service Code default 790 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial the station number which is forwarded 5 Press Speaker key or hang up To set Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code default 793 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then th...

Страница 102: ...e Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code default 744 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker key or hang up To set Call Forward All Split 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Immediate Service Code default 682 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial 1 INT to set the destination for Internal calls or 2 EXT to set the destination for External calls 5 Dial the destination extension or off premise...

Страница 103: ... Answer Split Service Code default 684 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial 1 INT to set the destination for Internal calls or 2 EXT to set the destination for External calls 5 Dial the destination extension or off premise number 6 Press Speaker key or hang up Refer to Call Forwarding on page 1 83 To cancel Call Forward No Answer Split 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward No Answer Sp...

Страница 104: ...Forward Both Ring Split Service Code default 686 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial 1 INT to set the destination for Internal calls or 2 EXT to set the destination for External calls 5 Dial the destination extension Call Forward Both Ring Split does not support Off Premise destinations 6 Press Speaker key or hang up Refer to Call Forwarding on page 1 83 To cancel Call Forward Both Ring Split 1 Pick up the handse...

Страница 105: ...ons Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming DIL calls ring an idle Department Group member and then follow PRG 22 08 programming then PRG 22 05 programming Default Settings Enabled Syst...

Страница 106: ...ollow Me Flexible Line Key flashes if assigned when Follow Me is set To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own Multiline Terminal 1 At your Multiline Terminal press Speaker key and dial Service Code 746 PRG 11 11 07 OR Press the Call Forward Follow Me key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 Code 15 2 Dial 0 to cancel 3 Dial 0 Cancel All Forward Follow Me OR Dial the extension number with Follow Me set To ...

Страница 107: ...ditions If a call that forwards Off Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID and the called party does not answer before the timer in PRG 34 07 05 the call recalls to the station that performed the transfer Call Forwarding Off Premise requires loop start trunks with disconnect supervision The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24 digits Call Forward...

Страница 108: ...11 03 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward No Answer 743 11 11 04 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward Busy No Answer 744 11 11 05 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call For ward Both Ring 745 11 11 45 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward All Split 682 11 11 46 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Ca...

Страница 109: ...Signaling Automatic Override COS 01 15 1 21 03 01 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 1 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Re lease Warning Tone 1800 seconds 24 09 01 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Type 0 24 09 02 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Destina tion for Both Ring All Call No Answer not assigned 24 09 03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom ...

Страница 110: ...Entry Operation Automat ic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group 602 11 11 26 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automat ic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group 603 11 11 27 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Destina tion of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group 604 13 01 01 Speed Dialing Function Setup Speed Dialing Auto Outgo ing Call Mode 0 13 04 01 Speed Diali...

Страница 111: ...s the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 PRG 15 07 10 PRG 15 07 15 or SC 751 Key Code 10 15 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the Trunk Access Code default 9 Number 9 2142622000 Trunk access codes are 9 ARS Trunk Group Routing 704 Line Group 1 9 01 99 or 001 100 or 9 Line number e g 05 or 005 for line 5 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function key flashes To cancel Call Forw...

Страница 112: ...vate Call Forwarding for a Door Box This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key dial SC 722 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forward Device key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset dial 722 2 Dial the Door Box number 1 8 3 Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded 4...

Страница 113: ...ding The Speed Dial bin must be defined in PRG 13 04 01 for the line to forward 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 733 3 Dial trunk port number to be used 01 96 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 734 3 Dial trunk port number to be used 01 96 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Department Group Line Forwarding Method 1 Set the Destination and Forward the Li...

Страница 114: ...ion in PRG 24 05 01 Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding The Speed Dial bin must be defined in PRG 13 04 01 for the line to forward 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 602 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 32 to be defined 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 603 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 32 to be defined 4 Press Speaker key to hang up SL1100 I...

Страница 115: ...mponent s None Related Features Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Bypass Call 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call Forward Over ride Bypass not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Cl...

Страница 116: ...erride an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb 1 Call the forwarded or DND extension 2 Press the Override key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 37 or dial 707 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 104 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override C ...

Страница 117: ...r the person that is performing the Call Monitoring Pressing Mute key toggles the Coaching ability on and off Conditions Call Monitoring is allowed for internal calls An extension user cannot Monitor an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using Hands free Answerback Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker key An extension user cannot monitor a conference however an...

Страница 118: ...or Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Monitor COS 01 15 0 20 13 15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate COS 01 15 0 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive COS 01 15 0 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Di...

Страница 119: ...a busy extension 1 Call a busy extension 2 Press the Barge In key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 34 OR The following steps are not available for DISA 1 Dial the extension number of the busy internal party 2 Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710 To Call Monitor without first calling the busy extension 1 Press Speaker key or lift handset 2 Dial 710 or press the Barge In key PRG 15 07 or SC...

Страница 120: ...with the feature ACD V1 5 or higher Transferred Department Group all ring mode Door Box Virtual Extension Conditions After pressing the Call Redirect key the call does not recall to the extension The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number When a call is Redirected to another phone it does not follow the forwarding on that phone If the call redirect is set to ...

Страница 121: ...s Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Class 1 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect COS 01 15 1 Operation To redirect a ringing call With an incoming call ringing your extension press the Call Redirect key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 49 Destination Extension Number without lifting the handset ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 109 C ...

Страница 122: ...en hangs up the system converts the Camp On to a callback Off Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 750 to Camp On and or DID callers from automatically camping on Function keys simplify Call Waiting Camp On operation An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension Trunk Queuing lets an extension user camp on to a trunk Call Queuing must ...

Страница 123: ...not queued 1 On Calls are queued default 1 20 13 05 Intercom Off Hook Signaling This option enables or disables a users ability to receive off hook sig nals 0 Off ICM off hook signaling disa bled 1 On ICM off hook signaling ena bled default 1 20 13 06 Automatic Off Hook Signaling This option enables or disables the users ability to manually or auto matically receive off hook signals 0 Off manually...

Страница 124: ...9 default 770 11 16 05 Single Digit Service Code Camp On Assign the access code that will be used for setting Camp On The access codes in PRG 11 16 are used when the caller hears a busy or ring back tone and not from an idle state Maximum of 1 digit 0 9 default 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys This program is used on a per station basis to assign different function keys to the Multiline Termina...

Страница 125: ...kflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls The operation depends on the setting in PRG 20 03 01 This operation is valid only before the caller performs the camp on operation refer To Camp on a busy extension step 2 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 113 C ...

Страница 126: ...e Callback 4 As soon as caller B answers the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring C...

Страница 127: ...extension 2 Dial 750 or press the Callback key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 35 3 Hang up 4 Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back If the unavailable extension was unanswered not busy the Callback goes through after your co worker uses their telephone for the first time If you have Callback Automatic Answer you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset ...

Страница 128: ...4 When the telephone rings lift the handset You hear the Hold tone 5 Hang up SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 116 Callback C ...

Страница 129: ...ID is disabled on the system voice mail displays the message count Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post message playback menu is still displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys When Centralized Voice Mail is used the remote voice mail user gets only Caller ID number when voice mail answers incoming CO calls and performs an Await Answer transfer to the remote us...

Страница 130: ...m ber Program Name Default 14 01 22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Mail 0 14 02 10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID 0 15 02 04 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial Speed Dial Control 0 Operation None SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 118 Caller ID Call Return C ...

Страница 131: ...digits for non ACD calls V1 5 or higher Once installed and programmed Caller ID is enabled for all trunk calls including Ring Group calls Calls transferred from another extension Calls transferred from the VRS Calls transferred from Voice Mail unscreened Direct Inward Lines DILs Caller ID temporarily stores 50 calls total of abandoned and answered unanswered New calls replace old calls when the bu...

Страница 132: ...n option for Single Line Terminals to display Caller ID Caller ID Sender Queuing Added The SL1100 system can provide Caller ID calling party number to a Single Line Terminal with a display The system can queue incoming calls to the Single Line Terminal if the system Caller ID sender resources are busy Refer to PRG 20 19 05 in the SL1100 Programming Manual If the Single Line Terminal user lifts the...

Страница 133: ...Call by Call basis PRG 14 01 20 PRG 14 01 21 and PRG 20 08 15 are used for analog trunks only and can only be set on a per trunk Class of Service basis SLT cannot block an incoming call based on the incoming Caller ID information on a station by station basis The CPU with MEMDB has 32 resources for DTMF receiving and Dial Tone detection When a EXIFE installed there are 32 resources available When ...

Страница 134: ...unction for External Module This command enables or disables a Single Line Terminal with a dis play to show the caller ID received from the Telco This program is only for Single Line Terminals not digital or IP that have caller ID displays If the phone does not have a caller ID display do not enable this 0 Disable Caller ID not displayed 1 Enable Caller ID is displayed default 0 14 01 22 Caller ID...

Страница 135: ...Caller ID The display shows xxxxxxxxxxxxx mm dd hh mm Store DEL List Number xx Caller ID number mm dd hh mm incoming date and time Preview List Next List Store Store in List DEL Delete from List 4 Press the STORE softkey The display shows xxxxxxxxxxxxx mm dd hh mm STA Abb List Number xx Caller ID number mm dd hh mm incoming date and time STA Store in Station Speed Dial bin ABB Store in System Spee...

Страница 136: ...s J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В Enter characters π Σ σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Clear Bac...

Страница 137: ...umber yyyyyyyy Call Store Del More 5 Press Store key to choose the number 01 nnnnnnnn Today 11 26 STA Abb 6 Press Abb key to select an Abbreviated dial to store the number 01 nnnnnnnn Today 11 26 ABB ABBg 7 Press ABB key to select Common Abbreviated dial to store the number Store to ABB Common Enter Bin 8 Dial the Speed dial bin in which the number is to be stored If you press Hold key the next av...

Страница 138: ... Press the Left Cursor key twice and skip step 3 The display shows LIST MENU Redial CID 3 Press the CID softkey Caller ID The display shows xxxxxxxxxxxxx mm dd hh mm Store DEL List Number xx Caller ID number mm dd hh mm incoming date and time Preview List Next List Store Store in List DEL Delete from List 4 Press the STORE softkey The display shows xxxxxxxxxxxxx mm dd hh mm STA Abb List Number xx ...

Страница 139: ...h indicating a new call was placed in the temporary memory If enabled in programming the telephone display shows CHECK LIST 1 Press the Call History key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 08 or press the List softkey and CID OR Press the Left Cursor key twice The last addition to the list is displayed 2 Press the ARROW DOWN softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory 3 Press the DEL softkey to delete...

Страница 140: ...p step 2 2 Press the CID key 1st row of your display shows the Caller ID number If the Caller ID includes a name you can press Help key to view Unanswered this indicates that it is a call you missed unanswered The 2nd row shows the date and time of the call Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer 3 If the Caller ID includes a name you can press Help key to v...

Страница 141: ...peed Dial table PRG 13 04 This option can block calls on all trunks or it can be set on a per trunk basis Programming Examples for Flexible Ringing by Caller ID To refuse the Private Caller ID incoming call PRG 14 01 27 1 reject PRG 20 07 24 1 Enable for COS PRG 22 18 01 0 no transfer PRG 40 10 06 2 VRS message 2 then Turn on the Private Call Refuse mode using the service code PRG 11 10 32 or Prog...

Страница 142: ...Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match result is used The maximum number of VRS message channels that can be used simultaneously is 16 These channels are also shared with the voice mail This feature does not work with incoming trunk calls via networking from another system In this case the refuse routing program must be programmed in the system that has those trunks Ro...

Страница 143: ...y P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only default Not Assigned 13 04 03 Transfer Mode Per speed dial bin 000 999 set the transfer mode to internal dial or incoming ring group to route the caller to a destination In the above example phone number 2145551000 was assigned For this bin the transfer mode would be changed to internal dial Now that the mode is changed PRG 13 04 04 can be...

Страница 144: ...y other PRG 13 04 XX Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R default Not Assigned 40 10 07 Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse This program specifies the VRS message to be played to the caller when the Caller ID Refuse feature is activated If VRS Fixed Message is enabled PRG 40 10 01 a setting of 101 will play the following message to the caller Your call cannot go through 0 No Message Played 1 100 VRS Mess...

Страница 145: ...ge 1 100 101 VRS Fixed message Mes sage will only play if PRG 40 10 01 is enabled default 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys This program is used on a per station basis to assign different function keys to the Multiline Terminals Function key 86 is the Private Call Refuse key This key is used to enable or disable the Private Call Refuse feature When enabled all Private numbers received will be ...

Страница 146: ...extension number Follow PRG 22 02 01 2 Caller ID Number exists Search refusing Speed Dial area PRG 22 16 data exists Search PRG 13 04 01 Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 07 PRG 14 01 27 1 And refuse mode is No No Yes Yes Off On Data matched Data unmatched 0 1 2 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 134 Caller ID Flexible Ringing C ...

Страница 147: ...r ID PRG 22 18 01 Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 06 Ring the extension number Follow PRG 22 02 01 Disconnect the call Ring the incoming ring group Anything Else 2 Off On Private 0 1 2 Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 135 C ...

Страница 148: ...register for Caller ID personal Caller ID personal and Caller ID shared group are exclusive use Caller ID indication displayed when toggled by pressing Help key is shown below Caller ID Number Caller Name Caller Number ޓޓ Time and Date of call ޓ Answering extension Name Group Name Soft Keys ޓޓ 01 NEC Infrontia 2039265400 1 6 12 55 STA 200 Group01 ޓޓ or 01 NEC Infrontia 1 6 12 55 Call Store Del Mor...

Страница 149: ...xtension 297 8 Extension 298 8 Extension 299 8 1 The display of Caller ID Group 1 is as follows or 01 NEC Infrontia 1 6 12 55 Call Store Del More 01 2039265400 Group01 STA 200 Call Store Del More This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals The display of Caller ID Group 8 is as follows or 01 ADAM SMITH 1 6 12 55 Call Store Del More 01 2039265500 Group08 STA 299 Call Store Del More Th...

Страница 150: ...k up the call from a shop telephone The Automatic Off Hook Answer of Universal Answer Call options PRG 20 10 07 determines whether or not the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls This option allows a user to simply lift the handset to answer a ringing call dialing the service code is not necessary Additional Trunk Ring Tones Various ring tone patterns and melodies for incoming c...

Страница 151: ... Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s Any Trunk ETU i e COIDB B1 2BRIDB C1 1PRIU C1 etc Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD V1 5 or higher Call Forwarding Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Directed Call Pickup Do Not Disturb DND Group Call Pickup ISDN Compatibility Line Preference Long Conversation Cutoff Night Servi...

Страница 152: ... 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection To select options 8 10 press either 8 or Flash then press line keys 1 3 Key 1 is option 8 Key 2 is option 9 and Key 3 is option 10 1 15 02 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Ring Tone 2 15 02 22 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data ...

Страница 153: ...t eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment 1 22 06 01 Normal Incoming Ring Mode 1 22 07 01 DIL Assignment not assigned 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination 1 82 08 01 MF Level Sidetone Volume Setup 6 Operation To answer an incoming trunk call 1 Lift the handset To use Universal Answer t...

Страница 154: ...To change the ringing of your incoming trunk 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 720 2 3 Select the ringing 1 7 4 Press Speaker key to hang up SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 142 Central Office Calls Answering C ...

Страница 155: ...all Timer starts automatically after the user places a trunk call Disabling the trunk name seize display also disables the Call Timer The system can automatically select the correct type of line to use based on the number dialed and the time With Automatic Handsfree an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker key Users without Automa...

Страница 156: ... i e COIDB B1 2BRIDB C1 1PRIU C1 etc Related Features Alphanumeric Display Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Code Restriction Toll Restriction Dial Tone Detection Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Long Conversation Cutoff Microphone Cutoff Programmable Function Keys Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default Note 10 03 XX ETU Se...

Страница 157: ...roup 1 Order Numbers 2 3 4 0 Not Specified All Other Routes 2 100 and Or der Numbers 1 4 0 Not Speci fied 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Access Map 1 84 Trunk Ports 1 84 assigned with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing ac cess and access when trunk is on Hold 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection To select options 8 10 press either 8 or Flash then press line...

Страница 158: ...Warning Tone 1800 seconds 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk Timer 0 seconds 82 08 01 MF Level Sidetone Volume Setup 6 Operation To place a call over a trunk group 1 Go off hook 2 Dial 704 3 Dial trunk group number 01 25 4 Dial the number OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press the trunk group key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 02 group 2 Dial the number To place a call using Trun...

Страница 159: ...Trunk Number 001 084 1 The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call The trunk however can still be answered by any user programmed with the trunk access To Remove a Trunk from a Busied Out State 1 Press Speaker key dial 645 Trunk Number 001 084 0 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 147 C ...

Страница 160: ...termines if the system should route over the trunk group settings defined in PRG 21 02 or play an error tone When using ARS Class of Service with PRG 26 01 03 set to 1 Play Warning Tone any trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward Off Premise will not complete For a virtual to Call Forward Off Premise PRG 26 01 03 must be set to Route to trunk group and the call will follow t...

Страница 161: ... 15 1 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer COS 01 15 0 20 07 10 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Programmable Function Key Programming Appearance Level COS 01 15 1 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect ana log trunk only COS 01 15 1 20 07 12 Class of Service Options Administrator Level...

Страница 162: ...0 20 08 07 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Repeat Redial COS 01 15 1 20 08 08 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Toll Restriction Dial Block COS 01 15 1 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline Extension Ringdown COS 01 15 1 20 08 10 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Signal Voice Call COS 01 15 1 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgo...

Страница 163: ...ckup Another Group COS 01 15 1 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Serv ice Group Call Pickup for Specific Group COS 01 15 1 20 10 04 Class of Service Options Answer Serv ice Telephone Call Pickup COS 01 15 1 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Serv ice Directed Call Pickup for Own Group COS 01 15 1 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Serv ice Meet Me Conference and Paging COS 01 15...

Страница 164: ... Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect COS 01 15 1 20 11 17 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Department Group Trunk to Trunk Transfer Each Telephone Group Transfer COS 01 15 1 20 11 18 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service No Recall COS 01 15 0 20 11 19 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Hold Extended Park COS 01 15 0 20 11 20 Class of Serv...

Страница 165: ... In Monitor COS 01 15 0 20 13 11 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Initiating Exten sion COS 01 15 0 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Extension Be ing Monitored COS 01 15 0 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing DTMF Sig nal on ICM Call COS 01 15 1 20 13 14 Class of Service Options Supplementary Servic...

Страница 166: ...ice Options Supplementary Service Block Manual Off Hook Signal ing COS 01 15 0 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On COS 01 15 0 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Duration Timer Display COS 01 15 1 20 13 38 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Headset Ringing COS 01 15 0 20 13 39 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD...

Страница 167: ...ator Calling COS 01 15 1 20 14 06 Class of Service Options for DISA Inter nal Paging COS 01 15 1 20 14 07 Class of Service Options for DISA Ex ternal Paging COS 01 15 1 20 14 08 Class of Service Options for DISA Di rect Trunk Access COS 01 15 0 20 14 09 Class of Service Options for DISA Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point COS 01 15 0 20 14 10 Class of Service Options for DISA Call Forward...

Страница 168: ...MODE5 nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unchanged 8 Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold key You see MODE6 nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unchanged 9 Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold key You see MODE7 nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unchanged...

Страница 169: ...anges Clock Adjustment The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis This feature allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time Conditions The system retains the Clock Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset Changing the time may change the current Class of Service COS service depending on the COS mode...

Страница 170: ...s Setup Start of Month Summer Time 3 10 24 04 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week 2 10 24 05 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week Day 1 10 24 06 Daylight Savings Setup End of Month 11 10 24 07 Daylight Savings Setup End of Week 1 10 24 08 Daylight Savings Setup End of Week Day 1 20 02 07 System Options for Multiline Telephones Time and Date Display Mode 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions ...

Страница 171: ...5 Press Speaker key to hang up ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 159 C ...

Страница 172: ...e and Common Restrict Code Tables The system provides 10 tables with 10 entries in each table Each code is four digits maximum using 0 9 and Flash key as a wild card Common Restrict Code Table The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Code Restriction Classes Be sure you do not allow the codes you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permi...

Страница 173: ...his lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial up services You can make four entries 4 30 digits Toll Free Trunks Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted such as the company president s Private Line Users can place calls on Code Free Trunks anytime to anywhere without inadvertently being Code restricted PBX Call Restriction Code Restriction programming lets you...

Страница 174: ...f disabled and the trunk is used no toll restriction will be applied the trunk will have free dialing 0 Restriction Disabled Toll re striction will not be applied to calls on this trunk 1 Restriction Enabled Toll restric tion will be applied to calls on this trunk default 1 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Per Day Night Mode assign a toll restriction class to each extension It is rec...

Страница 175: ...lect the table defined in PRG 21 06 03 to be used to determine the maximum number of digits to be dialed in this toll restriction class If a user dials the amount of digits specified in PRG 21 06 03 the call will be restricted 0 No Table Applied 1 4 Tables 1 4 Defined in PRG 21 06 03 Defaults class 1 2 0 class 3 1 class 4 2 class 5 3 class 6 15 0 21 06 03 Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment ...

Страница 176: ...oll restriction class you can assign a Restrict Table 1 4 If the same entry exists in a restrict table and a permit table the permit table has a higher priority and the call will be permitted 0 No Permit Table Assigned 1 4 Restrict Tables 1 4 as signed in PRG 21 06 07 default 0 21 06 07 Deny Restriction Table If the system has Toll Restriction enabled users cannot dial numbers listed in these tabl...

Страница 177: ... user dials a number that is restricted the call will be routed to the operators phone PRG 20 17 0 Off Call restricted 1 On Call routed to operator default 0 Operation To place a trunk call if your system is Code Restricted 1 Place call normally If your Code Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial your call is cut off ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 165 C ...

Страница 178: ...triction Override overrides all Code Restriction programming Walking Code Restriction allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user When a call is placed using Walking Code Restriction the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in PRG 21 05 xx and PRG 21 06 xx Conditions Off Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines ...

Страница 179: ...R Output Options PBX Calls 1 35 02 03 SMDR Output Options Trunk Number or Name 1 35 02 04 SMDR Output Options Summary Daily 1 35 02 05 SMDR Output Options Summary Weekly 1 35 02 06 SMDR Output Options Summary Monthly 1 35 02 07 SMDR Output Options Toll Charge Cost 1 35 02 08 SMDR Output Options Incoming Call 1 35 02 09 SMDR Output Options Extension Number or Name 1 35 02 10 SMDR Output Options All...

Страница 180: ...ion from the extension In PRG 21 14 02 for each table assign the Toll Restriction Class of Service to be used when a user dials the 6 digit ID assigned in PRG 21 14 01 This entry should provide greater access than the level defined in PRG 21 04 01 The Toll Restriction Class of Service used is the same as those used by PRG 21 04 01 Refer to the Toll Restriction feature for defining these classes St...

Страница 181: ...sired entry In PRG 21 07 01 for each extension number set the 4 digit password a user dials to override the Toll Restriction In PRG 21 01 07 determine how long the system should remove Toll Restriction from the extension Figure 1 4 Temporary Code Restriction Override Operation To temporarily override a restricted extension Code Restriction You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1...

Страница 182: ...an extension You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 663 and dial the 6 digit Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service code After dialing the service code the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered As the last digit is entered the display is cleared and ICM...

Страница 183: ...assword and Class of Service control the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Conditions If the system is reset by a first initialize the Dial Block feature is cleared This feature is not available for ISDN S Bus extensions Both PRG 21 09 01 Code Restrict Class and PRG 21 ...

Страница 184: ...per Extension 0 90 19 01 Dial Block Release Release Dial 1 press Hold key Press Hold key to cancel Operation To set Dial Block 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 600 default 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block Code as set in programming 4 Dial 1 Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up To release Di...

Страница 185: ...ang up To release Dial Block from another extension 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 601 3 Dial the 4 digit Supervisor Dial Block code 4 Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block 5 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 6 Press Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Man...

Страница 186: ... telephone meeting when it is convenient to do so If a user s extension has Barge In monitor enabled PRG 20 13 10 they can Silent Monitor a conference already in progress PRG 99 01 49 option 49 must be set to 1 A Class of Service option is available which allows or denies an extension user from automatically setting up a Conference Tandem Trunking call upon hanging up the telephone An extension wi...

Страница 187: ... 08 Service Code Setup for Service Access Barge In 710 11 12 47 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Waiting Answer Split Answer 794 11 12 57 Service Code Setup for Service Access Tandem Trunking 8 11 12 58 Service Code Setup for Service Access Transfer Into Conference 624 11 16 02 Single Digit Service Code Setup Barge In not assigned 14 01 04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain Level for C...

Страница 188: ...ault 9 You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference 4 When called party answers press Conf softkey or Conf key twice If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference you have exceeded the system Conference limit If the call being added is busy unanswered With an outside call press the line key for a call previously added to the Conference The unanswered call d...

Страница 189: ...ing parties in the Conference Hookflash twice to set up the Conference again To drop an outside call from the Conference 1 Press Hold key to place the conference call on hold 2 Hang up The lines involved in the Conference ring back separately to the telephone 3 Answer and disconnect the unwanted outside call 4 To re establish the Conference answer the remaining call by pressing Conf softkey or Con...

Страница 190: ...e code if programmed Instead of the single digit service code the service code 710 can also be dialed at this point To Transfer a Call into a Conference 1 While on a call press Hold key 2 Dial the Transfer to Conference service code PRG 11 12 58 default 624 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system automatically places a Callback to the...

Страница 191: ...ce call is password protected so that any user joining the conference would be required to enter a password before being connected One terminal or trunk needs one conference channel to participate in the conference The conference call cannot be split over the CPU s two conference blocks limiting the number of conference participants to 16 Conditions None Default Setting Not defined System Availabi...

Страница 192: ...rence Group Setup Maximum Conference Dura tion 7200 20 34 05 Remote Conference Group Setup End Tone Alert Time 300 Operation To joining a Remote Conference Call 1 Internal Extension Lift the handset and dial the extension number of the Remote Conference pilot number assigned in PRG 11 19 01 OR External Party Dial the telephone number for the Remote Conference pilot number assigned in PRG 11 19 01 ...

Страница 193: ... non private mode to the private mode If the outside call is on a line key the user just presses the line key to switch from non private mode to private mode For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option trunks initially have the privacy released The remainder of the call is private If the call is on a Loop Key the user presses their Meet Me Conference function key instead Unlike pressing the l...

Страница 194: ...ion Tone COS 01 15 1 31 01 04 System Options for Internal External Paging Privacy Release Time 90 seconds Operation To join a Voice Call Conference if invited 1 After Conference request press indicated line key A Conf indication is displayed on both telephones A trunk with privacy release or Voice Call Conference blinks To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties 1 Press Sp...

Страница 195: ...ser access to outside services like automatic banking an outside Automated Attendant bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers OCCs After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow Without Continued Dialing the system Toll Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits See Programming below for additional information Continu...

Страница 196: ...Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Contin ued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call COS 01 15 1 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 2 21 05 04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of Digits Table As signment 0 21 06 03 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Maximum Number of Dig its Table Assignment Tables 1 4 30 Operation To use Continued Dialing 1 Place an intercom or trunk call 2 C...

Страница 197: ...Base Switching option is not used programmable keys 1 8 can be programmed as Programmable Function Keys such as Trunk Line Keys The Cordless DECT telephone can be used in conjunction with the SL1100 and IP4WW xxTXH Digital Multiline Telephones Cordless DECT telephone only supports connections with IP4WW xxTXH telephones Battery Capacity is 910 mAh 2 4 V with a Talk Mode of 16 hours typical and a S...

Страница 198: ...be pressed to retrieve the call from hold otherwise the call is transferred when the Cordless Telephone is placed in an idle state Cordless DECT telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature Default Settings None System Availability Terminals IP4WW 12TXH B TEL IP4WW 24TXH B TEL Required Components IP4WW 080E B1 Related Features Class of Service InMail Programmable Function Keys Guide to Fea...

Страница 199: ...p key to turn Global Off Hook Ringing On or Off LCD indicates ON or OFF as appropriate 7 Pressing MUTE key again will bring you back to function key 1 continue programming other function keys or go to step 8 8 Press the TALK key to exit Function keys F1 F8 can be programmed as Line Keys 1 16 Redial LNR SPD Answer ANS Feature FNC or Recall When assigned these keys operate the same as on an NEC mult...

Страница 200: ...am mode Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Cordless DECT Telephone Using the Base Unit To change to the cordless phone press and hold Function Key 7 for several seconds When the cordless phone is selected there is no message on the LCD To change to the desk phone press and hold Function Key 8 for several seconds SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 188 Cordless DECT Telephone C ...

Страница 201: ... in even when Barge In is allowed in Class of Service When any Multiline Terminal or Single Line Terminal calls a station with Data Line Security a constant busy tone is heard Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 15 02 12 Multiline Telephone Basic Setup 5 20...

Страница 202: ...ter com Off Hook Signaling COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Auto matic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override COS 01 15 1 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On COS 01 15 0 Operation None SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 190 Data Line Security D ...

Страница 203: ...ne Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Central Office Calls Answering Secondary Incoming Extension Virtual Extensions Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Access Map 1 84 Trunk Ports 1 84 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing acce...

Страница 204: ...ither the Trunk key or CAR SIE VE key To program a CAR SIE VE key on a phone 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold key once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key will ring 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 ...

Страница 205: ...1 26 cancel When this feature is activated any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number go immediately to the transfer destination and do not ring anyone in the group To set up the destination you use PRG 24 05 and PRG 13 04 Once these programs are set the access code assigned in PRG 11 11 27 can be used to change the destination as needed Delay This feature can be enabled or disabled by usi...

Страница 206: ...n a line becomes free The VRS can also transfer calls to Department Groups Refer to Voice Response System VRS on page 1 798 for information on setting up the VRS The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is Busy on a call In Do Not Disturb Call Forwarded Logged Out Conditions When a DIL rings to a Department Group the DIL may follow overflow programming PRG 22 01 04 and PRG...

Страница 207: ... All Ring Mode Operation does not work to a Secondary Department Group Default Settings Disabled Priority Routing CALL IF IF IF Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Figure 1 5 Department Calling Priority Call Routing ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual...

Страница 208: ... Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 Figure 1 6 Department Calling Circular Routing System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s VRS for Messaging SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 196 Department Calling D ...

Страница 209: ...r that extension For ex ample if two phones are idle and one phone has a priority of a 1 and the other phone has a priority of a 2 the phone with the priority 1 will receive the call If this is set to circular every new call to the pilot number will cycle to an idle extension in a circular order The priority of the extension is not used When using a department group for Voice Mail this program mus...

Страница 210: ...e Voice Mail department group as Busy No Answer 0 No Hunting 1 Hunting when Busy 2 Hunting when Not Answered 3 Hunting when Busy No Answer default 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions This program is where to assign the extensions to the department group When using a department group for Voice Mail do not assign more ex tensions in the group than the system is licensed for 1 32 de...

Страница 211: ...up up to 16 extensions can be assigned as backup extensions to the group Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default Not Assigned 16 03 02 Secondary Department Groups Priority This program sets the extensions priority within the department group The lower the number that is assigned the higher the priority is 0 999 Priority 0 999 default 0 Operation To call a department group 1 Go off hook 2 Dial department e...

Страница 212: ... The key goes out when you log back in To change the Department Group Overflow Destination 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 604 Department Group 01 32 3 Dial 01 08 Refer to PRG 24 05 4 Dial the destination the calls route to 5 Press Hold key SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 200 Department Calling D ...

Страница 213: ...epartment Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In PRG 20 08 12 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension ability to use Department Step Calling When using department group step calling and ecology mode there must be at least two terminals functioning for the step call feature to work Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Department ...

Страница 214: ...nt Group Step Calling COS 01 15 1 Operation To make a Step Call 1 Place a call to a busy Department Group member OR Place a call to a Department Group pilot number 2 Dial Department Step Code 2 to call the next available Department Group member 3 Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members You step through Department Groups set in PRG 16 02 01 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 202 Department Step Callin...

Страница 215: ...ient can set following programs automatically however other IP related programs such as PRG 84 26 have to set manually as required IP Addresses PRG 10 12 01 CPU PRG 10 12 09 VOIPDB Subnet Masks PRG 10 12 02 CPU PRG 10 12 10 VOIPDB Default Gateway PRG 10 12 03 DHCP Client PRG 10 63 and existing DHCP Server feature PRG 10 13 can not be used at the same time While the System accesses the DHCP Server ...

Страница 216: ...0 63 01 DHCP Client Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 1 10 12 01 IP Address CPU 192 168 0 10 10 12 02 Subnet Mask CPU 255 255 255 0 10 12 03 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 IP Address VOIPDB 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 Subnet Mask VOIPDB 255 255 0 0 Operation None SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 204 DHCP Client D ...

Страница 217: ... in handset mode Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode but only for internal calls The tone is still heard for external dialing Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 11 11 19 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Ope...

Страница 218: ...2 Dial 724 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 206 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone D ...

Страница 219: ...omatically using a feature like Last Number Redial the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group Refer to the chart under Programming for more information Conditions None Default Settings Disabled for manually dialed calls enabled for automatically dialed calls System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialin...

Страница 220: ...ne Not Detected 3 21 01 06 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial Pause at First Digit 1 second Table 1 10 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction Method 14 02 05 14 02 11 Result if dial tone not present Press a line key or Dial 9 Trunk number 0 0 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 0 1 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 1 0 Trunk drops 1 1 Trunk drops Dial a Trunk Group code or Automatically through a f...

Страница 221: ...the system has VRS installed you must press to preview a number Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Voice Response System VRS Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extensio...

Страница 222: ...umber without dialing it out press Hold key To use Dial Number Preview to place a call by Directory Dialing Multiline Terminal only When set PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 To preview any number press key and dial the number you wish to call OR To preview a Speed Dial System Group number 1 Press Down Cursor key and press 1st character you want to search 2 Press...

Страница 223: ...k units and are supplied to the PLO The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows 1 1PRIU C1 2 2BRIDB C1 3 CPU Conditions If multiple PRIs exist the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down the system begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI If multiple BRI...

Страница 224: ...Main KSU Exp KSU PRI PRI Figure 1 8 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2 In this example the PRI in slot05 was the first to synchronize with the carrier and became the PLO synchronization source The PRI in slot05 then went down and the system began looking forward in slot numbers to find the next PLO source In this case the PRI in slot02 was the next source because after it looks through the rest of t...

Страница 225: ...ronization Source priority list Main KSU Exp KSU Exp KSU T1 E1 T1 E1 BRI PRI Figure 1 12 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6 If multiple BRIs exist and no PRI or T 1 EXTERNAL exists the system chooses the first BRI that synchronized with the carrier In this example the BRI in slot02 synchronized with the carrier first and became the PLO synchronization source Main KSU Exp KSU BRI BRI Figure 1 13 Digi...

Страница 226: ...Guide to Feature Programming Refer to ISDN Compatibility on page 1 460 Operation Refer to the related features for details SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 214 Digital Trunk Clocking D ...

Страница 227: ...n table could convert digits 501 756 to extension numbers 301 556 The SL1100 system has 800 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the 20 DID Translation Tables One translation is made in each entry For a simple installation you can put all 800 entries in the same table For more flexibility you can optionally distribute the 800 entries among the 20 tables In addition to number c...

Страница 228: ...ts This gives you the option to analyze the SMDR report based on the number your callers dial This option also applies to an ISDN trunk DID Intercept DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions There are three DID Intercepts Vacant Number Intercept If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials Vacant Number Intercept can reroute the call to the programm...

Страница 229: ... to Voice Mail the Voice Mail protocol is based on the first destination routing When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destination by a busy intercept the Voice Mail protocol forwards busy calls When the incoming call is routed to the first destination by a ring no answer intercept the protocol forwards ring no answer The Voice Mail transfers the calls to the mailbox number defined in P...

Страница 230: ... PRG 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22 11 1 100 1111 1 00 00 09 00 1 2 09 00 12 00 2 3 12 00 13 00 3 4 13 00 18 00 2 5 18 00 00 00 1 6 00 00 00 00 0 7 00 00 00 00 0 8 00 00 00 00 0 Table 1 11 Example 2 Manual Change PRG 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22 11 1 100 1111 1 00 00 00 00 1 2 00 00 00 00 2 3 00 00 00 00 3 4 00 00 00 00 0 ...

Страница 231: ...01 Setting Example 0 00 0 00 8 00 17 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 PRG 22 11 01 PRG 22 11 02 1 4 300 Incoming 2 1 101 Incoming 3 4 300 Incoming Monday Friday PRG 22 17 05 1 On 0 00 0 00 9 00 15 00 13 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 PRG 22 11 01 PRG 22 11 02 1 4 300 Incoming 2 2 102 Incoming 3 3 103 Incoming 4 4 300 Incoming Saturday PRG 22 17 05 1 On 0 00 0 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 PRG 22 11 01 PRG 22 11 0...

Страница 232: ...ypes of trunks may use the DID table but the DID intercept feature for each DID number is not yet supported When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy or DND the reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension when the call is ringing to their telephone DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly The Off Hook Sig...

Страница 233: ...gs Disabled Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Off Hook Signaling Paging External Programmable Function Keys Station Message Detail Recording Transfer Guide to Feature Programming The programs listed below indicate the most commonly used programs required for this feature The programs are listed in the order that the installer sh...

Страница 234: ...uted to PRG 22 12 default 0 22 13 01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Per day night mode a translation area must be assigned to the trunk group This will allow for DID s to route to different places in day night modes 0 No Routing 1 20 Table Area assigned in PRG 22 10 default 1 22 10 01 DID Translation Table Setup Assign the DID translation tables in PRG 22 11 that are going to be u...

Страница 235: ...RG 22 01 07 expires 0 Disable Calls will not be routed to PRG 22 12 1 Enable Calls will be routed to PRG 22 12 default 1 22 12 01 DID Intercept Ring Group If the transfer operation mode is set PRG 22 11 04 and the call has overflowed through Transfer Destination Number 1 and 2 and Incom ing Ring Group Transfer is enabled calls will be routed to the destina tion in this program 0 Not Set 1 25 Ring ...

Страница 236: ... 4 22 17 01 DDI Translation Table Enter the digits received from the Telco that are going to be transla ted The amount of digits entered should be equal to the setting assigned in PRG 22 09 01 Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 500 tables entries max default Not Assigned 22 17 04 Dial In Conversion table Number Used to assign a DID translation table to one of the 100 entries in PRG 22 17 01 per day night mod...

Страница 237: ...de enter serv ice type 8 when the trunk should be a DID DDI Mode Switching trunk Trunks 1 84 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 11 02 DID Translation Number Con version Target Number For each DID Translation Table entry 1 800 specify the extension the sys tem dials after translation Do...

Страница 238: ...alls To Activate DID Call by Time Schedule 1 At any display Multiline Terminal press Speaker key 2 Dial the Dial In Mode Switching Service Code Default Not assigned OR Press the Dial In Mode Switching Programmable Function key PRG 15 07 01 88 or SC 751 Key Code 88 3 Dial 1 500 V2 0 or higher 100 V1 5 or lower table number 4 Dial the Time Pattern 1 8 Table 1 15 LED Flash Patterns Time Pattern LED A...

Страница 239: ...e destinations in steps 1 2 above are available the call continues to ring until a destination becomes free The DIL follows call forwarding programming even to voice mail When a call is transferred by Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy or DND the Reason for Transfer can display at the transferred extension You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier If a DIL de...

Страница 240: ...grams are listed in the order that the installer should follow Refer to the PCPro wizards for further detailed programming When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program Number Program Name Description Assigned Data 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup For an analog trunk to be DIL it must be set as a ty...

Страница 241: ...am 0 No Setting 1 25 Ring Group 1 25 102 Voice Mail Call goes to the VM pilot assigned in PRG 45 01 01 Operation To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the flashing line key for DIL on the Multiline Terminal Pressing the flashing line key puts the first call on hold and answers the second incoming call This can be repeated until all incoming calls are answered If yo...

Страница 242: ... the password entered with a specific user number which in turn has a Class of Service If the Class of Service allows the action such as making outgoing trunk calls the call goes through If the DISA Class of Service does not allow the action the system prevents the call The DISA Class of Service options are Trunk Group Routing ARS Access When a DISA caller dials into the system they may be able to...

Страница 243: ...lly play the voice prompt Please hold on All lines are busy Your call will be answered when a line becomes free while the caller waits The interval between the voice prompts is the VRS Waiting Message Interval Time When an extension in the Department Group becomes available the call automatically goes through If the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time the DISA call r...

Страница 244: ...med the same In a system with ARS enabled When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call if allowed the system routes the call via ARS In a system with ARS disabled When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call if allowed the system uses the routes programmed for Trunk Group Routing Transferred calls on DISA DID DIL ISDN trunks or from the VRS can display the reason a call is being transferred Ca...

Страница 245: ...lass of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reason for Transfer COS 01 15 0 20 14 01 Class of Service Options for DISA First Digit Absorption Delete First Digit Dialed COS 01 15 0 20 14 02 Class of Service Options for DISA Trunk Group Routing ARS Access COS 01 15 1 20 14 03 Class of Service Options for DISA Trunk Group Access COS 01 15 1 20 14 04 Class of Service Options for DISA Out...

Страница 246: ...s for VRS DISA Disconnect after VRS DISA retransfer to IRG 60 seconds 25 07 04 System Timers for VRS DISA Calling Time to Automatic An swering Telephone Set 10 seconds 25 07 05 System Timers for VRS DISA Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic Answering Telephone Set 10 seconds 25 07 06 System Timers for VRS DISA Duration Time for Guidance Message by ACI 10 seconds 25 07 07 System Timers f...

Страница 247: ...al the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk 2 Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone 3 Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code 4 Wait for a second unique dial tone 5 Dial an extension OR Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS OR Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code if enabled OR Dial 704 a trunk group number 1 25 for an outside call OR Dial 9 a trunk numb...

Страница 248: ...a DISA call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time PRG 25 07 07 a warning tone is heard and the user dials the Continue code PRG 20 28 01 to extend the conversation 3 After the programmed time PRG 20 28 03 the warning tone is heard again After the programmed time PRG 25 07 08 the call is disconnect...

Страница 249: ... keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code For example if they are Trunk Group 1 9 then storing 70401 under a DSS Console Key access Trunk Group 1 when the console user presses the key If they are more than 9 Trunk Group it will be 70401 The maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 12 DSS Lamp Table Changed to Apply to DSS Hotline Keys for Multiline Term...

Страница 250: ...Forward for all calls Trunk Group 02 and Virtual Extension 03 codes can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the additional data required The capacity of a console can be expanded by assigning a Page key shift key The Page key shift key must be assigned on keys 55 60 When a Multiline Terminal user is on a call they can transfer to another station by pressing a D...

Страница 251: ...ass 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Au tomatic Override COS 01 15 1 20 13 49 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service BLF Indication on CO Incoming State COS 01 15 0 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Number 301 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode 0 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Exten sion Number not assigned 30...

Страница 252: ...tel Status Code 6 Hotel DSS 3 RW 30 05 15 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 7 Hotel DSS 6 IW 30 05 16 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 8 Hotel DSS 4 IR 30 05 17 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 9 Hotel DSS 3 RW 30 05 18 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 0 Hotel DSS 0 Off 30 05 19 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code Hotel DSS 4 IR 30 05 20 DSS Console Lamp Table H...

Страница 253: ...speak Transferring a call using your DSS Console Needs to set at 30 03 1 Place or answer the call 2 Press Transfer key to transfer the call 3 Press the DSS key for the extension to receive the transfer 4 Optional Announce the call If called party does not want the call press the flashing line key to retrieve it Making an External Page using your DSS Console Needs to set at 30 03 1 Press the DSS Co...

Страница 254: ...en this key is ON DAY NIGHT BREAK NIGHT 2 The system is in the Day 1 Mode Night 1 Mode Break 1 Mode Night 2 Mode Using a DSS Console key as a One Touch or Programmable Function key A user can have DSS Console keys programmed as One Touch keys These keys can be used for Direct Station Selection Trunk Calling Personal Speed Dial Speed Dialing and Service Code access The stored service code cannot be...

Страница 255: ...nced Intercom calls Conditions Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using Directed Call Pickup Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call ringing at an ACD agent V1 5 or higher Default Settings Enabled System Availability Te...

Страница 256: ...ice Code Setup for Service Access Direct Exten sion Call Pickup 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Specified Trunk Answer 672 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Ex tension are Class 1 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Service Directed Call Pickup for Own Group COS 01 15 1 Operation To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co ...

Страница 257: ...boots The system resorts extension names when You change PRG 15 01 01 Extension Numbers and Names Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed Dial System Group Station Intercom Calling and One Touch Calling Extension Directory only shows a telephones VEs that are connected and have a name assigned in PRG 15 01 01...

Страница 258: ...ollows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled For example if your extension cannot normally use Speed Dial System Group Station Directory Dialing can not access it either 3 Dial letter number range for the party you want to call e g dial 2 for A B C or 2 You can enter several letters to help narrow the search Press to enter additional letters on the same key ex TOM 8666 6 4 Pre...

Страница 259: ... 5 Changed Conditions Single Line Terminal users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of the telephone incoming ring If PRG 22 03 01 is set to 0 3 and PRG 15 02 02 is set to 1 3 trunk calls follow the ring pattern in PRG 22 03 01 and the pitch in PRG 15 02 02 If PRG 22 03 01 is set to 4 8 and PRG 15 02 02 is set to 1 3 trunk calls follow the ring pattern in PRG 22 03 01 If PRG 22 03 01 is set to 0 8...

Страница 260: ...sage Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension 2 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Col or 1 15 02 38 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cy cle 2 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 0 Tone Pattern 1 15 10 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone ...

Страница 261: ...80 01 02 06 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 80 01 02 14 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 39 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number Refer to Programming Manual Table 1 18 Basic Tone Table Tone 06 Tone 06 Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level 1 0 No Tone 500ms 20 2 11 480 620Hz 21 21dB 500ms 20 3 0 No Tone 0ms 4 0 No Tone ...

Страница 262: ...al 711 3 Dial 1 to check ringing for intercom calls OR Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls 4 For Intercom calls select the pitch you want to check 1 7 OR For trunk calls select the pitch 1 7 you want to check 5 Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker key to hang up To change the pitch of your incoming ring Multiline Terminal only 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 720 3 Dial...

Страница 263: ...activate Do Not Disturb while on a call This option is not available for Single Line Terminals When DND and Call Forward are set on the same telephone call forwarding works If Busy and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations it follows the Busy forwarding If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4 callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone If an exte...

Страница 264: ...ram Name Default 11 11 08 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Do Not Disturb 747 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Bypass Call 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call Forward Override Bypass not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Clas...

Страница 265: ...Using Feature Key or Access Code Multiline Terminal have a dedicated DND button for setting this feature Steps to set up are same as for programmed key below 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the DND feature key programmed in PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 03 OR Press DND key OR Press Speaker key and dial 747 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked 2 Paging incoming Intercom...

Страница 266: ...s in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the following table Door Box Specifications Maximum Output 400 mV RMS Output Impedance 600 Ohms The system can have up to 6 Door Boxes Six chime tones are available Conditions The Door Box Feature Requires an unused analog extension port 084M B1 ST3 S...

Страница 267: ...oor Box Ring 1 6 Defaults Door Box 1 1 Door Box 2 2 Door Box 3 3 Door Box 4 4 Door Box 5 5 Door Box 6 6 32 04 01 Door Box Name Setup Per door box assign a name up to 12 characters long Maximum of 12 characters Defaults Door Box 1 Door 1 Door Box 2 Door 2 Door Box 3 Door 3 Door Box 4 Door 4 Door Box 5 Door 5 Door Box 6 Door 6 10 61 01 Relay Type If the door box requires a relay to activate the door...

Страница 268: ...s 0 9 default 702 Operation To call a Door Box Multiline Terminal 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 702 3 Dial Door Box Number 1 8 Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 702 3 Dial Door Box Number 1 8 To activate the Door Box strike Multiline Terminal 1 While talking to the Door Box press Flash key Single Line Terminal 1 While talking to the Door Box hookflash To answer a Door Box chime 1 Lift th...

Страница 269: ...To activate Call Forwarding Off Premise for a Door Box This option only works for ISDN PRI Trunks 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key dial SC 722 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the External Forward by Doorphone key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset dial 722 2 Dial the Door Box number 1 8 3 Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls...

Страница 270: ... lines The Drop key cannot be used for internal DID calls Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Flash PBX Compatibility Behind PBX Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 12 42 Service Code Setup for Service Access Flash on Trunk lines 3 11 12 59 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Drop Opera...

Страница 271: ... Setup Hookflash Time Selection 2 14 3 0 seconds Operation To use the Drop key from a Multiline Terminal with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Press the Function key programmed as a Drop key 2 Receive the new CO PBX dial tone 3 Dial the desired number To use the Drop key feature from a Single Line Terminal with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Hookflash 2 Receive internal dial tone 3 Dial the Service Code P...

Страница 272: ...n is unusable until it comes out of power cut mode Combination of time schedule and Manual mode change When using department group step calling and ecology mode there must be at least two terminals functioning for the step call feature to work When a phone has entered power cutting mode any direct calls to the terminal will follow the stations call forwarding If the phone is part of a chain call f...

Страница 273: ...on Power off state Power on state Time schedule Operation 0 00 6 00 19 00 19 00 0 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 19 00 19 00 0 00 0 00 6 00 Figure 1 16 Time Schedule 2 During power cutting off state Outgoing calls can not be made Incoming calls receive a busy tone Call forward features work at the forward set terminal Disables Both Ring CFW Follow Me Power saving mode The system activates power saving mod...

Страница 274: ...to Programming Manual 11 10 44 Cutting the telephone power 731 Operation Ecology Mode Power Cutting for terminal To cut the power for package 2 during night time 19 00 6 00 Program PRG 20 42 01 PKG 2 Night Mode Service Group No 1 PRG 20 42 01 PKG 3 Night Mode Service Group No 1 PRG 20 43 01 PKG 2 Night Mode 1 Eco Mode 1 Night Mode 2 Eco Mode 0 PRG 20 43 01 PKG 3 Night Mode 1 Eco Mode 1 Night Mode ...

Страница 275: ...roup No 1 PRG 20 43 01 PKG 2 Night Mode 1 Eco Mode 1 Night Mode 2 Eco Mode 0 PRG 20 43 01 PKG 3 Night Mode 1 Eco Mode 1 Night Mode 2 Eco Mode 0 PRG 12 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns Night Group Mode Time pattern Set Time No Start End Night Mode 1 1 1 0100 0100 1 1 2 1 0100 0100 2 PRG 12 03 Weekly Night Service Switching Night Group Mode 1 Sunday Time pattern 2 Monday Time pattern 1 Tuesday Ti...

Страница 276: ...aturday Time pattern 1 Power OFF PKG 3 KSU Power OFF PKG 2 2 F 1 F Figure 1 18 Weekly Night Service Power Saving Mode Program PRG 15 02 18 TEL 200 1 PRG 20 02 10 1 minute 1 Idle state at TEL200 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 264 Ecology E ...

Страница 277: ...2 One minute later LED area highlighted in red becomes dark at TEL200 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 265 E ...

Страница 278: ... ability to other supervisory extensions as well Emergency Routing When an extension user dials 911 the system can automatically find a trunk for the call The system can choose a route to which the user normally does not have access If all normal routes are busy the system can even disconnect an active call and place the emergency call E911 Compatibility uses the flexibility of the Automatic Route...

Страница 279: ...with dialing 911 CAMA Trunks are not supported The 911 Cut Through feature works when dialing trunk Access 911 Calling Party Number CPN CPN sent when making a normal trunk call from a terminal Table 1 21 CPN for Standard Calls PRG 20 08 13 PRG 21 12 01 PRG 21 13 01 CPN PRG Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None 1 Assigned None 1 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assi...

Страница 280: ...13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Off Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None 1 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned None 1 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE On Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None 1...

Страница 281: ...hen making a 911 call from a Virtual Extension VE Table 1 24 CPN for VE 911 Calls PRG 20 08 13 PRG 21 12 01 PRG 21 13 01 CPN PRG Terminal VE Off Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None 1 Not Assigned Assigned None 1 Assigned Not Assigned None 1 Assigned Assigned None 1 Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21...

Страница 282: ...VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal 1 The CPN provided is from the service provider CPN sent when making a 911 call from a terminal by pressing a CO Line Key and then dialing 911 Table 1 25 CPN for Line Key 911 Calls PRG 20 08 13 PRG 21 12 01 PRG 21 13 01 CPN PRG Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None 1 Assigned None 1 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned ...

Страница 283: ...Priority 1 84 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order Number Route 1 Order Number 1 1 Trunk Group 1 Order Numbers 2 3 4 0 Not Specified All Other Routes 2 25 and Order Numbers 1 4 0 Not Specified 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and oth er Extension are Class 1 20 08 16 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Num b...

Страница 284: ...ensions not assigned Operation To place an emergency 911 call When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is enabled 1 Go to any telephone 2 Lift the handset or press Speaker key 3 Dial 911 When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is disabled 1 Go to any telephone 2 Lift the handset or press Speaker key 3 Dial a trunk access code e g 9 or press a line key 4 Dial 911 To turn off the E911 Alarm at ...

Страница 285: ...s Enabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Drop Key PBX Compatibility Behind PBX InMail Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 12 42 Service Code Setup for Service Access Flash on Trunk Lines 3 14 02 03 Analog Trunk Data Setup Flash Type 0 14 02 04 Analog Trunk Data Setup Hooking Type 0 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup 0 1...

Страница 286: ... 81 10 08 COI Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time Selection 2 14 3 0 seconds Operation To flash the trunk you are on From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press Flash key From a Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 3 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 274 Flash F ...

Страница 287: ...llows night mode group Program 12 05 of the terminal Soft Key Menu Index 1 Index 2 Input Data Ring Preferences Intercom Menu 41 Ring Type 1 8 Ring Preferences Line Keys Menu 42 Ring Type 1 8 Ring Preferences Each Line Keys Menu 43 Line Key 001 Trunk Max Night Mode 1 8 Ring Type 1 8 Conditions When the ring tone is changed at the terminal the changed data is saved to Program 15 28 01 When Program 1...

Страница 288: ...nk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup Trunk incoming ring tone Assign individual ring tones at extension for each trunk and each Night mode When 0 Trunk incoming ring tone is selected it follows the setting of Program 15 02 02 0 Operation To set ring tone of each line by service code 1 Press SPK service code 761 2 Dial Trunk number 01 84 3 Dial Night Mode number 1 8 4 Dial incoming ring tone nu...

Страница 289: ...softkey Current set Ring type is indicated at 2nd line of LCD 6 Press the Select softkey Then set ring tone is heard The or the softkey can change ring tone to select 7 Press the Save softkey Incoming ring tone of the trunk was set Then can continue to next trunk 8 To finish setting press the Back and the Exit softkey ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 277 F ...

Страница 290: ...e normally 9 This is the code users dial to access Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing 11 20 01 Dial Extension Analyze Table Use tables 01 128 to assign the digits to be dialed using the Dial Extension Analyze Tables These tables are used when PRG 11 01 01 is set to option 9 Dial Extension Analyze Up to 8 digits can be assigned and the valid entries are 0 1 9 11 20 02 Dial Extension A...

Страница 291: ...em selects table 1 Example for 310X Example for 3100X 10s Group 4 digit 100s Group 5 digit 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 4 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 5 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 310 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 3100 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom Example for 31000X Example for 310000X 1000s Group 6 digit 10 000s Group 7 digit 11 01 0...

Страница 292: ...r Each Trunk Line 733 11 10 07 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line 734 11 10 08 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Set ting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer 735 11 10 09 Charging Cost Display by the Supervisor not assigned 11 10 11 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction not assigned 11 10 12 Service Code Setup for System ...

Страница 293: ... monitor on off to ter minal SC 1 Extension Number Room Monitor enable SC 0 Extension Number Room Monitor disable 610 11 10 46 Watch Message Setting Service Code setting for Watching message recording to VRS 614 11 10 47 Warning Message Setting Service Code setting for Warning message recording to VRS 615 11 10 48 Auto Dial Setting for Security Sensor Service Code setting for destination number wh...

Страница 294: ...ones 720 11 11 21 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Check Incoming Ring Tones 711 11 11 22 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Ex tension Name Programming 700 11 11 23 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Second Call for DID DISA DIL 679 11 11 24 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Change Station Class of Service 677 11 11 25 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry ...

Страница 295: ...ion Set Cancel Call Forward Both Ring Split 686 11 11 50 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Message Waiting Indication not assigned 11 11 51 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Cancel Message Waiting Indication not assigned 11 11 52 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward All Destination No Split 790 11 11 53 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Op...

Страница 296: ...r Dial 715 11 12 14 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Group Access 704 11 12 15 Service Code Setup for Service Access Specified Trunk Access 9 11 12 17 Service Code Setup for Service Access Clear Last Number Dialing Data 776 11 12 18 Service Code Setup for Service Access Clear Saved Number Dialing Data 785 11 12 19 Service Code Setup for Service Access Internal Group Paging 701 11 12 20 ...

Страница 297: ...n Trunk lines 3 11 12 43 Service Code Setup for Service Access Answer No Ring Line Universal Answer 0 11 12 44 Service Code Setup for Service Access Callback Test for SLT 799 11 12 45 Service Code Setup for Service Access Enabled On Hook When Holding SLT 749 11 12 46 Service Code Setup for Service Access Answer On Hook When Holding SLT 759 11 12 47 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Wait i...

Страница 298: ...sion 633 11 14 08 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension 634 11 14 09 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Room to Room Call Restriction 635 11 14 10 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction Hotel 636 11 14 11 Service Code Setup for Hotel Change Toll Restric tion Class for Other Extension 637 11 14 12 11 14 12 Service Code Setup for Hotel Check In...

Страница 299: ...ingle Digit Service Code Setup Intercom Off Hook Signaling 11 16 05 Single Digit Service Code Setup Camp On 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call Forward Override Bypass not assigned 11 16 07 Single Digit Service Code Setup Message Waiting 0 11 16 08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice Over 6 11 16 09 Single Digit Service Code Setup Access to Voice Mail 8 11 16 10 Single Digit Servic...

Страница 300: ...placing CO calls users must dial each digit in this time Station Timer Class is referred by stations Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID Automatic An swer Trunk trunks 21 01 09 20 31 06 Hotline Time Start Time A Ringdown extension automatically calls its pro grammed destination after this time Station Timer Class is referred by the stations which sets Hotline 22 01 03 20 31 07 Ring No Answer Alar...

Страница 301: ... Time Determine the time trunk to trunk conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 08 20 31 20 Long Conversation Disconnect Time This timer determines how long the system waits be fore disconnecting a trunk to trunk conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 09 20 31 21 DISA Internal Pagi...

Страница 302: ...otline Time Start Time Hotline Start 5 seconds 20 31 07 Timer Class Timer Assignment Ring No Answer Alarm Time 60 seconds 20 31 08 Timer Class Timer Assignment DIL Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 0 seconds 20 31 09 Timer Class Timer Assignment DID Ring No Answer Time 20 seconds 20 31 10 Timer Class Timer Assignment Hold Recall Time Non Ex clusive Hold 90 seconds 20 31 11 Timer Class Timer Assig...

Страница 303: ...stem Options for Hold Hold Recall Time 90 seconds 24 01 02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Callback Time 30 seconds 24 01 03 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Time 90 seconds 24 01 04 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time 30 seconds 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Normal 90 seconds 24 02 03 System Options for Transfer Delayed Call Forwarding Ti...

Страница 304: ...ly use this feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available Conditions This feature only works on an analog trunk ISDN and IP trunks do not have the Forced Trunk Disconnect available Default Settings COS 15 Enable COS 01 14 Disable System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s Analog Trunks Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Guide to Feature Programming ...

Страница 305: ...as the system disconnects the trunk You can now place a call on the free trunk 3 Press the line key for the trunk disconnected in step 2 OR Dial the trunk access code 9 trunk number for the trunk disconnected in step 2 Single Line Terminal 1 Dial trunk access code 9 trunk number You hear busy tone Trunk numbers are 001 084 2 Dial Service Code PRG 11 10 26 You hear confirmation beeps as the system ...

Страница 306: ...her pickup group when the user does not know the group number There are 32 Call Pickup Groups available Conditions A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name Group Call Pickup can be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park Group Call Pickup cannot be used to answer calls ringing Call Arrival Keys or Virtual Extensions Virtual Extensions can use Group Call Pickup to answer calls ri...

Страница 307: ...ns Answer Service Telephone Call Pickup COS 01 15 1 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Service Directed Call Pickup for Own Group COS 01 15 1 20 10 09 Class of Service Options Answer Service Call pick up Callback 1 23 02 01 Call Pickup Groups Refer to Programming Manual Operation To answer a call ringing another telephone in your Pickup Group 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 At M...

Страница 308: ...2 At Multiline Terminal only press the Group Call Pickup key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 26 group OR Dial 768 and the group number 1 32 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 296 Group Call Pickup G ...

Страница 309: ...ten Conditions An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen Group Listen is not available to Single Line Terminals Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Digital Multiline Terminal Required Component s None Related Features Handset Operation Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class...

Страница 310: ...r co workers hear your caller s voice over your telephone speaker after pressing Speaker key To talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen 1 Hang up the handset To cancel Group Listen without hanging up your call 1 Do not hang up 2 Press the flashing Speaker key You can talk to the caller over the handset Your co workers can no longer hear the caller s voice SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 298 Group Listen G...

Страница 311: ...inal and answer the incoming call or held call by Off Hooking the Handset transmit Mute is canceled temporary and back to original Mute state when On Hook At PRG 15 02 50 MIC Lamp Status Change Mute key LED can be set either way Default is LED On when Mute On Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Programmable Function...

Страница 312: ...Operation While talking on a terminal handset 1 Press Mute key SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 300 Handset Mute Handset Cutoff H ...

Страница 313: ... or for both outgoing calls and incoming calls Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset but must lift the handset to speak Conditions Handsfree and Monitor are not available for Single Line Terminals Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus determines what happens when the user presses Speaker key Monitoring volume may be adjusted using the...

Страница 314: ...Service Signal Voice Call COS 01 15 1 Operation To talk Handsfree 1 Press Speaker the Trunk Line or the Virtual Extension key 2 Place the call 3 Speak toward the telephone when the called party answers To change a handset call into a Handsfree call 1 Press Speaker key and hang up the handset 2 Press Speaker key again to hang up To change a Handsfree call into a handset call 1 Lift the handset To t...

Страница 315: ...eaker and microphone in the telephone instead of the handset With Microphone Cutoff enabled Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep instead of two Incoming Intercom calls always ring Single Line Terminals The extension you are calling must be set to Voice for this feature to work Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Compone...

Страница 316: ...1 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call COS 01 15 1 Operation To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial 721 3 Press Speaker key to hang up This disables Forced Intercom Ringing To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial 723 3 Press Speaker key to hang up...

Страница 317: ...he Headset function key becomes a release disconnect key and no dial tone is heard from the speaker While in the headset mode the hook switch is not functional An extension with a headset can still receive voice announced Intercom calls and respond handsfree when idle A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminal...

Страница 318: ...jack on the bottom of the telephone 2 Program a Headset key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 05 You hear a confirmation beep To use the headset The Headset key lights when on a call To disconnect press the Headset key again You can still use the handset for calls or respond to voice announced Intercom calls with the headset plugged in The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed 1 Answer a ringin...

Страница 319: ...Hold The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension Hold Recall to Operator Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that are left on hold too long With Hold Recall to Operator A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Time The recalling trunk rings the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold Exclus...

Страница 320: ... on Hold 15 02 06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Hold Key Operating Mode 0 15 02 07 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Hold for CO Lines 1 15 02 11 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Callback Automatic Answer 1 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Department...

Страница 321: ...ons for Hold Forced Release of Held Call 1800 seconds Operation System Hold To place an outside call on System Hold Press Hold key To pick up an outside call on System Hold 1 If you know the specific line number dial 672 Line number 001 084 Exclusive Hold To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold Press the Exclusive Hold key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 45 Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 749 To...

Страница 322: ...Press Speaker key 2 Dial 762 Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 762 Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Hold key 2 Press Speaker key to hang up To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press the flashing Hold key SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 310 Hold H ...

Страница 323: ...vailable A Department Calling Group allowing for example your guests to reach the first available agent in your reservation desk group A Department Calling Group A Department Calling Group allowing for example your guests to reach the first available agent in your reservation desk group Message Waiting If you call a guest while they are away from their room leave them a Message Waiting When the gu...

Страница 324: ... DND anytime they need privacy for example if they need to work uninterrupted Do Not Disturb DND blocks the room telephone incoming calls and Paging announcements This can be set from the room phone or attendant phone Flexible Numbering Plan To simplify dialing guests and services in your facility customize your system to have room numbers match phone extension numbers For example if the rooms on ...

Страница 325: ...641 Extension of the room you want to set Room sta tus code 1 4 Hang up 1 Room Clean Occupied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required Room Status Printouts Have your printer output the Room Status Print out Lift handset 642 Room Status Printout option 0 5 Hang up 0 All Printouts 1 Room Status List Check in and House Cleaning Status 2 Call Restriction List 3 Do Not Disturb and Room Cle...

Страница 326: ...censed The following dial access codes can be used only if the CPU is licensed for the Hotel Motel Feature Dial Access Codes that Require SL SYS HOTEL LIC Program Dial Access Code Description 11 10 16 626 Leaving Message Waiting Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel Motel 11 14 01 627 Set DND for Own Extension 11 14 02 628 Cancel DND for Own Extension 11 14 03 629 Set DND for Other Extension 11 14...

Страница 327: ...xtension 629 11 14 04 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel DND for Other Extension 630 11 14 05 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension 631 11 14 06 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Exten sion 632 11 14 07 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension 633 11 14 08 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Exten sio...

Страница 328: ...ment Extension Number not assigned 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS consoles DSS One Touch key 101 160 The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS consoles No Setting 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System based US English 42 01 01 System Options for Hotel Motel Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call Hotel Mode 0 42 01 02 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up...

Страница 329: ... Motel Change Room Status for Own Extension 1 42 03 12 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel SLT Room Monitor COS 01 15 1 42 04 01 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes No setting 42 05 01 Hotel Room Status Printer Output Port Type 0 42 05 02 Hotel Room Status Printer Output Destination Number No setting 42 05 03 Hotel Room Status Printer Wake Up Call No Answer Data 0 42 05 04 Hotel Room Status Printe...

Страница 330: ...rvisor s stations can remotely activate and cancel Do Not Disturb for room telephones If you allow room telephones to activate DND you should also allow supervisor stations to remotely activate and cancel Checking out a guest also deactivates their phone Do Not Disturb Conditions None Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Refer to Hotel Motel Required Component s Refer to Hotel M...

Страница 331: ...otel DND Setting for Own Exten sion 1 Setting Up Operation To Enable DND at a room telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 627 You hear confirmation tone after you dial the code 3 Hang up The supervisor s station user can still call the extension by using the business mode feature Do Not Disturb Override ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 319 H ...

Страница 332: ...s ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 629 3 Dial the number of the extension for which you want to enable DND You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up To Cancel DND enabled at another room telephone Normally only the supervisor s station has this ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 630 3 Dial the number of the extension for which you want to disable DND You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up SL1100 ISSUE 2 ...

Страница 333: ...siness mode DSS Console features including One button calling to extensions Door Boxes and outside lines Busy Lamp Field BLF for extensions and Door Boxes Night Service Mode switching One button access to Service Codes and Programmable Feature Key codes Conditions None Default Settings DSS Consoles are not assigned Refer to Setting Up DSS Console Monitoring on page 1 323 after plugging in the cons...

Страница 334: ...m ber Program Name Default 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode 0 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Extension Num ber not assigned 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment This key in Hotel Motel Mode Has this Function Function Code 92 Wake Up Call Indication Function Code 93 Room Status Indication Function Code 95 Page Switching The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS con soles DSS One Touch key 101 16...

Страница 335: ...are off If the DSS key is The guest has ON Red A Message Waiting OFF No messages To check which room telephones have Wake Up Calls set 1 Without lifting the handset press the WAKE UP key Function Code 92 If the DSS key is The guest has ON Red Wake Up Call set OFF No Wake Up Call set FAST FLASH Red Wake Up Call missed ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 323 H ...

Страница 336: ...ble SLOW FLASH Red Maid Required MEDIUM FLASH Red Maid in Room FAST FLASH Red Inspect To view the Status of rooms 1 54 or 61 114 1 Without lifting the handset press the PAGE SWITCHING key Function Code 95 If the DSS key is The DSS Console Indicates ON Red Buttons 1 54 are Rooms 1 54 SLOW FLASH Red Buttons 61 114 are Rooms 61 114 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 324 Hotel Motel DSS Console Monitoring H ...

Страница 337: ...ave mail parcels or other packages for a guest dropped off at your front desk Instead of constantly redialing the room hoping to find the guest in just send them a Message Waiting In that way you ll be sure to get a return call as soon as the guest arrives An option is available for analog Single Line Terminals with MW Lamp to allow for a Message Waiting indications Conditions None Default Setting...

Страница 338: ... Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Message Waiting COS 01 15 1 Setting Up Operation To leave a Message Waiting Normally only the supervisor s station has this ability 1 Call the room telephone SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 326 Hotel Motel Message Waiting H ...

Страница 339: ...thout first calling the extension The supervisor s station is typically the only phone with this ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 626 3 Dial the number of the room telephone where you want to leave the message waiting You hear confirmation tones To answer a Message Waiting left at your telephone Your Message Waiting lamp flashes when you have a message 1 Lift the handset and listen for dial tone ...

Страница 340: ... cleaning is complete This option is Inspection Required on the Room Status Printout Normally only the front desk can use this option House Cleaning Options Maid Required The room is vacant was inspected and needs to be cleaned The room is not checked out and available for a new guest This option is Maid Required on the Room Status Printout Maid in Room House cleaning is currently working in the r...

Страница 341: ...42 02 03 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup Room Status Reference Only 42 03 01 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check In Operation 1 42 03 02 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check Out Operation 1 42 03 06 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Room Status Change for Other Extension 1 42 03 11 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Change Room Status for Own Extension 1 42 09 01 Flexible Setup ...

Страница 342: ...ecked in as the guest registers at the front desk 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 638 3 Dial the extension number of the room you want to check in You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up In the STATUS mode the DSS Console key for the room is on SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 330 Hotel Motel Room Status H ...

Страница 343: ...ff can set the room status 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 640 3 Dial the room status code 1 Room Clean Occupied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Request 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up In the STATUS mode the DSS Console shows the room status Slow Flash for Maid Required Fast...

Страница 344: ...ntenance Request 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 5 You hear confirmation tone 6 Hang up In the STATUS mode the DSS Console shows the room status Slow Flash for Maid Required Fast Flash for Inspect Room SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 332 Hotel Motel Room Status H ...

Страница 345: ... rooms that are Checked Out waiting to be cleaned up 313 Call Restriction List Option 2 The Call Restriction List shows the status of Room to Room Call Restriction and Toll Restriction at each phone In the following report Room to Room Barring Shows which extensions have Room to Room Call Restriction enabled 311 Outside Call Class Lists the Toll Restriction Level for each extension If an extension...

Страница 346: ...at are checked out or available clean Wake Up Call List Option 5 This report lists all the rooms that have Wake Up calls 307 311 and 339 and shows the time set for each call An asterisk in front of the extension number indicates that the Wake Up Call was unanswered Consider checking on the guests that have unanswered Wake Up Calls Room Status Reports require a LAN connection Conditions None Defaul...

Страница 347: ...Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 42 05 01 Hotel Room Status Printer Output Port Type 0 42 05 02 Hotel Room Status Printer Output Destination Number No setting 42 05 03 Hotel Room Status Printer Wake Up Call No Answer Data 0 42 05 04 Hotel Room Status Printer Check Out Sheet 0 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 335 H ...

Страница 348: ...peration To have your printer output the Room Status Printout Your printer should be located conveniently next your telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 642 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 336 Hotel Motel Room Status Printout H ...

Страница 349: ... All Printouts 1 Room Status List Check in and House Cleaning Status 2 Call Restriction List 3 Do Not Disturb and Room Clean List 4 Message Waiting List 5 Wake Up Call List 4 Hang up ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 337 H ...

Страница 350: ...nable Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest s phone neither you nor any other Hotel Mode extension can call them while they are checked in To call the guest s phone first dial 639 to cancel the restriction This may have implications in emergency situations Checking out a room by dialing Service Code 639 automatically cancels Room to Room Call Restriction Default Settings Disabled System Availa...

Страница 351: ... number You hear confirmation tone The guest cannot dial any other Hotel Mode extension Consider having a single emergency phone that is not set for Hotel Mode e g the operator The guest can always call that phone even with restriction enabled To disable Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest s telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 636 3 Dial the guest s telephone number You hear confirmation ton...

Страница 352: ...this example dialing 5 could output 1050 which would leave a Message Waiting at extension 105 Voice Mail If you have mailboxes for your services such as housekeeping your guests can leave requests even when the service providers are unavailable You cannot miss the requests and your guests can appreciate the convenience A Department Calling Group If you have several agents with extensions at your r...

Страница 353: ... Refer to Programming Manual 21 01 02 System Options for Outgoing Calls Intercom Interdigit Time 10 seconds 42 04 01 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes No setting Setting Up Operation When a guest wants to use Single Digit Dialing They lift the handset and press a single dial pad key 1 9 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 341 H ...

Страница 354: ...ny cases such simplified Toll Restriction scenarios may be adequate However since each mode uses the full abilities of the system Toll Restriction programming you can make the calling restriction as elaborate as it needs to be Toll Restriction When Checked In also allows you to change the Toll Restriction of a room telephone while the room is checked in This allows you to provide more permissive T...

Страница 355: ...None Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Refer to Hotel Motel Required Component s Refer to Hotel Motel Related Features Hotel Motel ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 343 H ...

Страница 356: ...alls 0 21 06 01 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup International Call Restriction Table Tables 1 10 No Setting 21 06 02 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup International Call Permit Code Table Tables 1 20 No Setting 21 06 03 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment Tables 1 4 30 21 06 04 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Common Per mit Code Table Table 1 911 Table 2...

Страница 357: ...e a room telephone Toll Restriction When Checked In level If a room Toll Restriction is changed using access code 637 that room keeps the new setting until it is either changed using access code 637 or in system programming 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 637 3 Dial the number of the extension for which you want to change the Toll Restriction When Checked In level You hear a single beep ISSUE 2 0 SL1100...

Страница 358: ...4 Enter the new Toll Restriction When Checked In level 01 15 You hear confirmation tone SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 346 Hotel Motel Toll Restriction When Checked In H ...

Страница 359: ...ole Monitoring on page 1 321 Optionally have unanswered Wake Up Calls call the operator and print on the Room Status Printout report This helps you find out who needs another reminder or might need assistance See Room Status Printout on page 1 333 for more on the printed report Use Wake Up Call as a meeting reminder for convention attendees If the meeting time gets changed you can reset the remind...

Страница 360: ... 42 01 02 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Message Assign ment 0 42 01 03 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call No Answer 0 42 01 04 System Options for Hotel Motel Setup Message Mode for Wake Up Call Hotel Mode 0 42 01 05 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Message Assign ment 0 42 03 05 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 1 42 03 ...

Страница 361: ...Setting Up Operation To set a Wake Up Call for your own room 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 631 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 349 H ...

Страница 362: ...rvisor s station has this ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 633 3 Dial the number of the room phone that should receive the wake up 4 Dial the time for your wake up Use a 24 hour clock For example 1 00 PM 1300 You hear confirmation tone 5 Hang up To cancel a Wake Up you have set for another room 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 634 3 Dial the number of the room phone whose wake up you wants to cancel You...

Страница 363: ...umber When both Hot Key Pad and Dialing Number Preview are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Dialing Number Preview does not work When both Hot Key Pad and Hotline are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Hotline does not work When placing an outgoing call with the Hot Key Pad feature the user must dial the trunk access code before dialing the called party number The ARS feature can be used...

Страница 364: ...Outgoing Call Service Hot Key Pad COS 01 15 0 Operation To place an intercom call using Hot Key Pad The Multiline Terminal is idle No need to press Speaker key 1 Dial the extension 2 Dialed extension rings To place a trunk call using Hot Key Pad The Multiline Terminal is idle No need to press Speaker key 1 Dial the trunk access code 9 by default and the external destination number you wish to call...

Страница 365: ... There are 128 hotlines available Conditions An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner s extension If a station is an ACD agent the Hotline key blinks to indicate the ACD agent s status V1 5 or higher Hotline keys can be assigned to the DSS consoles Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing mo...

Страница 366: ... Automatic On Hook Transfer COS 01 15 0 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Over ride COS 01 15 1 21 01 09 System Options for Outgoing Calls Ringdown Ex tension Timer Hotline Start 5 21 11 01 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment not assigned 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priority 1 30 05 02 DSS Console Lamp Tabl...

Страница 367: ...mp Table VM Message Indication 3 RW Table 1 26 Extension Busy Setup PRG 20 13 06 PRG 20 02 03 BLF Status Busy Status 1 1 0 Off No 2 1 1 On Yes 3 0 0 On Yes 4 0 1 On Yes Operation To place a call to your Hotline partner 1 Press the Hotline key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 01 partner s extension number You can optionally lift the handset after this step for privacy To transfer your outside call to your Ho...

Страница 368: ...s left off hook or the telephone is left off hook without dialing Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 18 02 Service Tone Timers Busy Tone Timer 15 seconds 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 Service Tone Setu...

Страница 369: ...etects the light it can turn on off the illumination automatically At PRG 15 02 65 if it the brightness is below the number it will illuminate the terminal and if it is above the setting it will turn off the illumination If PRG 15 02 65 is set to 0 it will work by the setting done at PRG 15 02 64 In this case PRG 15 02 61 will control the brightness when to turn on and PRG 15 02 64 will control th...

Страница 370: ...ld auto setting 13 15 02 65 Auto Backlight bound threshold manual setting 0 15 02 66 Dial Button Backlight 1 Operation To change the Backlight brightness 1 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key and dial Service Code 705 2 Dial 1 to set MAX Brightness or dial 2 to set MIN Brightness 3 Press Cursor Up or Down key to change the brightness Unless you have PRG 15 02 63 1 ON as you press Up or Down il...

Страница 371: ...y after you dial the Threshold To Cancel Automatic Backlight 1 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key and dial Service Code 706 2 Dial 0 to cancel the Automatic Backlight After you dial 0 you will hear a Beep sound 3 Press Speaker key after you dial 0 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 359 I ...

Страница 372: ...on that is unanswered busy or in Do Not Disturb The caller presses their Voice Mail key to leave a message in the called extension mailbox There is no need to call back later Transferring to Voice Mail By using Transfer to Voice Mail a Multiline Terminal extension user can Transfer a call to the user s or a co worker s mailbox After the Transfer goes through the caller can leave a message in the m...

Страница 373: ...der Refer to Caller ID on page 1 119 for more information on setting up this feature Security Code Enhancement After a subscriber sets their Security Code they can choose to make it required for all logons or just remote logons When enabled for all logons the subscriber must always enter their Security Code to access voice mail even from their own extension If enabled just for remote logons the su...

Страница 374: ... With Security Code Programming InMail provides softkeys when programming the security code These softkeys allow a user to select OK CLEAR or EXIT following an entry of a new code InMail Internal Message Notification Timer When Message Notification places a call out the system waits up to 30 seconds for ringback reorder or busy tone from the trunk If detected notification call out processing begin...

Страница 375: ...has not been recorded a caller leaving a message in the subscriber mailbox hears At the tone you can leave your message for extension number or name Refer to the InMail Feature Manual for complete details on setting these features Conditions When using V1 5 or higher software InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a KTS to KTS SL Net V1 5 or higher When using V2 0 or higher software the...

Страница 376: ... message count for New and Saved messages does not update until the mailbox user hangs up and calls back into the InMail InMail and Analog Voice Mail cannot be used at the same time in the same system The first port of InMail must start with one of the following ports 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45 49 53 57 61 65 69 73 77 79 81 85 The number of speech path channels on the CPU for the In Mail and the V...

Страница 377: ...e the port num bers provided in the description sec tion default Not Assigned 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to the InMail ports that were assigned in PRG 47 01 17 The extension numbers assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 11 01 Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default Station Port No 1 84 Extension Number 101 184 15 03 01 SLT Signaling Type Assign all extension n...

Страница 378: ...e hunting types see the section in this fea ture labeled Enhanced Hunting It is recommended to set the Voice Mail department group as 3 Busy No Answer 0 No Hunting 1 Hunting when Busy 2 Hunting when Not Answered 3 Hunting when Busy No Answer default 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions This program is where to assign the extensions to the department group When using a department g...

Страница 379: ...ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement Wait Tone Type at Mes sage Interval Determine what the caller hears between the messages 0 Ring Back Tone 1 Music On Hold Tone 2 Background Music Source default 0 41 19 07 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement ACD Forced Discon nect Time after 2nd Announcement Assign the time the system waits after the end of the ACD delay message before disconnecting 0 64800 seconds ...

Страница 380: ...dial the Voice Mail master number and your mailbox number instead You can also use this procedure from your own telephone to call a co worker s mailbox 2 If requested by Voice Mail enter your security code Checking Messages 1 Press the Voice Mail key once The voice mail is called When there are new messages the Message Waiting LED on the telephone flashes red With this option set the MSG key can b...

Страница 381: ...nsion user s mailbox which receives the transfer If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits before routing the called user s mailbox This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of having it picked up by Voice Mail 4 Hang up Voice Mail prompts your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected OR 1 Dial extension number or press a DSS Con...

Страница 382: ...The system automatically reconnects you to your call To stop recording hookflash twice You can restart and stop recording as required Personal Answering Machine Emulation Multiline Terminal Only To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation 1 Press Speaker key or lift the handset at the Single Line Terminal and choose from the following dial access codes 741 Call Forward Immediate 742 C...

Страница 383: ...ng Message Pause or restart recording E 3 Erase recording Exit recording mode E 3 Erase the Directory Dialing Message Go back to the System Administrator options Using Directory Dialing 1 After the Automated Attendant answers wait for the Directory Dialing Message The Automated Attendant may ask you to dial a digit for Directory Dialing 2 Dial the letters that correspond to the name of the person ...

Страница 384: ...ry does not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 0830 8 30 AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00 PM Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Wednes day from 10 30 AM to 5 00 PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 1 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 1 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 3 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 4 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 05 Entry01 End Day 1 Entry d...

Страница 385: ...Time 0830 8 30 AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00 PM Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday from 11 00 AM to 1 00 PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 2 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 2 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 4 Wednesday 47 12 05 Entry01 End Day 5 Thursday 47 12 06 Entry01 Da...

Страница 386: ...es not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 0830 8 30 AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00 PM Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christ mas day from 8 30 AM to 5 00 PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 9 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 05 Entr...

Страница 387: ...x number must be set in PRG13 04 11 If not set the system requires the normal log in procedure or entering a valid mailbox and security code to login Two different mailboxes can not be tied to the same inbound CID number If two mailboxes are set for the same inbound CID number the system uses the first match it finds This feature is only supported for external calls to the InMail Mobile Extension ...

Страница 388: ...e to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data not assigned 13 04 02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name not assigned 13 04 11 Speed Dialing Number and Name Automatic Access to Voice Mail by Caller ID 0 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension Target Setup 0 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 0 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk R...

Страница 389: ...ial area No 0 100 VM BOX 1 Call DIL number 2 After the VM is answered user can enter VM Box 100 directly 3 Announce the zone OR Trunk 1 03 1234 5678 DID Outside party number 09087654321 PRG 22 02 01 Trunk 1 DID PRG 22 11 05 Set transfer destination 102 InMail PRG 13 04 01 Speed Dial area No 0 09087654321 PRG 13 04 11 Speed Dial area No 0 100 VM BOX 1 Call the DID number to set the transfer to InMa...

Страница 390: ...tension Target Setup No 0 4321 PRG 13 04 11 Speed Dial area No 0 100 VM BOX 1 Call DIL number 2 After the VM is answered user can enter VM Box 100 directly SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 378 InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID I ...

Страница 391: ... When the extension user enables Cascading Message Notification the system will try each enabled destination that is active for the current day V2 0 or higher and time i e in schedule The system will not try any destinations that are disabled or are not in schedule When the retries for a particular destination have been met the system will immediately move to the next destination Conditions Retry ...

Страница 392: ...Figure 1 21 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 380 InMail Cascade Message Notification I ...

Страница 393: ...Figure 1 22 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 381 I ...

Страница 394: ...e numbers assuming the retry attempts are at default The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings Depending on the system ARS routing maybe needed to properly route external calls 1 The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 382 InMail Cascade Message Notification I ...

Страница 395: ...ximum number of callout attempts is reached the next new message will restart the process Message Notification to Pager Numbers Below a basic overview of how Message Notification works with pager numbers assuming the retry attempts are at default The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings Depending on the system ARS routing mayb...

Страница 396: ...ation 0 47 20 02 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification Begin Hour 00 47 20 03 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification End Hour 00 47 20 04 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification Type 1 47 20 05 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification Number Refer to Programming Manual 47 20 06 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification Busy Attempts 5 47 20 07 Stat...

Страница 397: ... i g u r e M b o x 1 0 1 C o d e N o t f y C a l l H M o r e Dial N 6 Press Notify Notification Type Selection menu M e s s a g e N o t i f i c a t i o n P h o n e E m a i l B a c k Dial P 7 Press Phone All Message Notifications Setting menu P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n O f f O n O f f D e s t B a c k 2 All message Notifications Setting menu P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n O f f O n O f f D...

Страница 398: ...ne Telephone SL1100 Multiline Telephone Only Dest1 Destination 1 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 1 Menu Dest2 Destination 2 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 2 Menu Dest3 Destination 3 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 3 Menu Dest4 Destination 4 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 4 Menu Dest5 Destination 5 Proceed to Notification Destination Selecti...

Страница 399: ...isable Turn destination x notifications off Change Change Go to destination x notification setting menus Back Back Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu Key Operation Key 2 Go to destination x notification setting menus Key 3 Toggle destination x notifications on off Key Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu 5 Message Notification Programming Begin Hour N o t i f i c a t ...

Страница 400: ...y o f W e e k T u e D i s a b l d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t 10 Message Notification Programming Wednesday V2 0 Added D a y o f W e e k W e d E n a b l e d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t D a y o f W e e k W e d D i s a b l d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t 11 Message Notification Programming Thursday V2 0 Added D a y o f W e e k T h u E n a b l e d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t D a...

Страница 401: ...b e r O K C l e a r N e x t E x i t 16 Message Notification Programming Security Code Required S e c u r i t y C o d e O p t i o n R e q N o R e q N e x t E x i t Soft key Operation IP Multiline Telephone SL1100 Multiline Telephone Only Req Required Turn Security Code Required flag On NoReq Not Required Turn Security Code Required flag Off Next Next Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt...

Страница 402: ...p current setting and return to main Notification menu 18 Message Notification Programming RNA Attempt count Soft key Operation IP Multiline Telephone SL1100 Multiline Telephone Only Next Next Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification menu Exit Exit Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu Key Operation Key 0 9 Set RNA Attempt count Key Keep current setting and proceed...

Страница 403: ... Back More Phone Notification Log onto Subscriber Mailbox Mailbox Options menu Notification Type Selection menu All Message Notifcations Setting menu Notifcation Destination Selection menu A B Press Notify Dial 6 Press VM xx Press More Press Phone Dial 7 Press Off Dial 6 Press On Dial 6 Press Dest Dial 3 Press Dest Dial 3 Press On Press Off Press Back Dial Press Dest1 Dial Press Dest2 Dial Press D...

Страница 404: ...ress Disbl Press Chnge Dial 2 Press Chnge Dial 2 Press Chnge Dial 2 Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Dial 2 digit 01 12 Press Next Dial Press Next Dial Press PM Dial 7 Press AM Dial 2 Press Next Dial Press PM Dial 7 Press AM Dial 2 Press Exit Dial Press Exit Dial Dial 2 digit 01 12 Press Next Dial Press Exit Dial Press Exit Dial Press Next Dial Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Enbl Press Back Dial Press...

Страница 405: ...ext Dial Press Disbl Press Enbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Message Notification Programming Thursday Press Next Dial Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Enbl Press Back Dial Press Next Dial Press Disbl Press Enbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Message Notification Programming Friday Press Next Dial Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Enbl Press Back Dial Press Next Dial Press Disbl Press Enbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Message Notific...

Страница 406: ...llecting the Email Notification Data In order for the installation site s InMail to send email notifications it must have a valid SMTP email account assigned To save time during programming use the following table to help collect the system s email account information The email account provider can supply this information See Programming in this feature for more Table 1 28 InMail Email Account Inf...

Страница 407: ...Outside Caller Reply To 1 is The Reply To Email Address data from PRG 47 18 09 OR The Send From Email Address data from PRG 47 18 09 SMS Text Message Delivery to a Cell Phone The table below shows the basic format of a InMail email notification delivered to a cell phone as an SMS Text Message The information is much the same as that delivered to an email account There may be more than one text mes...

Страница 408: ...creen MESSAGE FROM XXXX SUBJ VOICE MESSAGE FROM XXXX 0M6S VOICE MESSAGE ARRIVED ON MONDAY SEPT 17 3 51 PMDURATION 0M 6S NEC 1 OF 2 SENT 3 51PM 09 17 POP3 Login InMail Email Notification supports POP3 Login The logic of this method is that it allows a user to send e mail from any location as long as they can demonstrably also fetch their mail from the same place Check with your email provider to se...

Страница 409: ...ourcellphonenumber tmomail net Verizon yourcellphonenumber vtext com Virgin Mobile yourcellphonenumber vmobl com A Universal SMS Portal Teleflip yourcellphonenumber teleflip com A More Complete SMS Portal Listing For a more complete SMS portal list see http www livejournal com tools textmessage bml mode details Conditions The E MAIL notification feature is licensed on a per system basis Refer to t...

Страница 410: ...8 09 InMail SMTP Setup Reply to Address No setting 47 19 01 InMail POP3 Setup Server Name No setting 47 19 02 InMail POP3 Setup POP3 Port 110 47 19 03 InMail POP3 Setup Encryption 0 47 19 04 InMail POP3 Setup User Name No setting 47 19 05 InMail POP3 Setup Password No setting 47 20 01 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification 1 47 20 02 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options ...

Страница 411: ...ons Notification Secur ity 0 47 22 09 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Day of Week Sun day 0 V2 0 Added 47 22 10 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Day of Week Mon day 0 V2 0 Added 47 22 11 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Day of Week Tues day 0 V2 0 Added 47 22 12 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Day of Week Wed nesday 0 V2 0 Added 47 22 13 Group Mailbox Mess...

Страница 412: ...n Alternately dial O 6 b Off Select to turn email notification off Alternately dial O 6 c Back Select to exit without making any changes Alternately dial Refer to the InMail Feature Manual for more information about this feature SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 400 InMail Email Notification I ...

Страница 413: ...all active in schedule destinations have been tried the caller can then choose to try Find Me Follow Me again or select another option You can set up Find Me Follow Me for an extension in system programming In addition an extension user can set up Find Me Follow Me from their Mailbox Options Conditions This feature requires SL VM ADVANCE LIC 1015 Find Me Follow Me settings can be changed using the...

Страница 414: ...nd Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Number Refer to Program ming Manual 47 23 01 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me 0 47 23 02 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Begin Hour 00 47 23 03 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me End Hour 00 47 23 04 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Number Refer to Program mi...

Страница 415: ...n for the selected desti nation Enter 2 digits for the hour Press or Next to skip to the next setting A 2 Select AM AM P 7 Select PM PM Back up to the previous level without changing your entry Exit Enter the Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Sunday Saturday Enable or Disable V2 0 Added E 3 Enable selected day Enbl D 3 Disable selected day Disbl Back up to the previous level without changing your entr...

Страница 416: ...nsions language options is allowed on a class of server basis in PRG 20 13 53 All the supported Languages are initially available in the InMail CF Supported Languages InMail Languages Telephone Display Languages 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian Fr...

Страница 417: ...e Language Se lection for Specific Extension 0 Operation To Language Setting Operation The Display Information and Soft keys are available for IP Multiline Telephone SL1100 Multiline Telephone From an Idle Display Phone When PRG15 02 60 0 Prog Press Program Softkey Press down arrow Press down arrow Lang Press Language Softkey Disp To change telephone display language press Display Softkey Own To c...

Страница 418: ...extension display language press Own Softkey Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow to advance to next page Press softkey for desired language Press Speaker Exit Other To change another spoken mailbox language press Other softkey Ext Enter the extension number to be changed Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow to advance to next page Press softkey for desired language...

Страница 419: ...ial 2 to Park and Page The caller returns to these options if the Park is not picked up 3 Dial 3 for other options Normally this routes to the extension s Next Call Routing Mailbox InMail Park and Page is available at Personal and Group Subscriber Mailboxes and can be enabled through system programming or via the subscriber s Mailbox Options Menu InMail Park and Page is not applicable to Intercom ...

Страница 420: ...No If unanswered caller hears greeting can leave a message and dial options from the Next Call Routing Mailbox Defined 1 Yes 1 Yes If unanswered caller can dial 1 to leave a message 2 to Park and Page and 3 for other options from the Next Call Routing Mailbox For automated attendant unscreened UTRF and screened STRF transfers refer to Table 1 35 Park and Page Call Handling on page 1 408 Table 1 35...

Страница 421: ...on Program Number Program Name Default 47 02 04 Transfer Recall Time 30 47 02 09 InMail Station Mailbox Options Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 47 02 14 InMail Station Mailbox Options Next Call Routing Mailbox 1 47 02 17 InMail Station Mailbox Options Enable Paging 0 47 02 18 InMail Station Mailbox Options Paging Option 0 Setting Up Park and Page for a Group Mailbox Program Number Program Na...

Страница 422: ...nately dial E 3 Done Select to confirm the recording and exit the recording mode Alternately dial c Del Select to erase the Paging Message Alternately dial E 3 d Back Select to go back to the Mailbox Main Menu Alternately dial To set your call handling options refer to Table 1 37 Setting the Call Handling Options on page 1 410 Table 1 37 Setting the Call Handling Options Recording Your Paging Mess...

Страница 423: ...rsonal parked orbit refer to Table 1 38 Picking Up a Parked Call on page 1 411 Table 1 38 Picking Up a Parked Call Picking Up a Parked Call In these Instructions Telephone Softkey To retrieve a call parked in a Personal Orbit 1 Dial 2 Dial the number of the extension at which the call is parked ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 411 I ...

Страница 424: ... Bit Rate 64 kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 kHz Audio Format CCiTT μ law User Pro Access Options There are two different User Pro login types available to make changes To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SL1100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 User Admin Mode UA Mode This mode allows the user admin to access any ...

Страница 425: ... message name to determine this information Table 1 39 Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits or VRS for the VRS message T Message Type Greeting or VRS message Recorded message NNN Message number three digits YYYY Year MM Month 1 12 DD Date 1 31 HH Hour 00 23 MM Minute 00 59 SS Second 0 59 Conditions Uplo...

Страница 426: ... in the CF The actual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro The message number modified date and file size are displayed instead If there is no message file will be displayed and the download delete icon will not be displayed The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically to see new messages the page must be refreshed For instance if a new message is received via regular...

Страница 427: ...efer to Pro gramming Man ual Troubleshooting The table below shows possible Error messages and their causes Error Message Cause VMDB is not attached The VMDB is not attached Mailbox XXX does not exist XXX mailbox number The mailbox does not exist The mailbox is being used by another session When the mailbox is being used by another session either PC or phone There is no available space in the CF W...

Страница 428: ...d choose to allow the file to download Depending on Windows configuration you may be prompted again to either Open or Save the message To listen click Open and the default WAV file player will play the message To save the message click on the Save icon and browse to the location where the message will be saved on a local PC Listening to Voice Mail Messages using Mailbox User Mode UB 1 To login ope...

Страница 429: ...ssage No enter the greeting number to be replaced on the voice mail Browse to find the location where the greeting file is stored Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name Depending on file size and LAN speed it may take several minutes to upload the greeting The uploaded greeting will appear in the assigned location Changing Mailbox Greetings using Mailbox User Mode UB Audio...

Страница 430: ...n the voice mail Browse to find the location where the greeting file is stored Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name Depending on file size and LAN speed it may take several minutes to upload the greeting The uploaded greeting will appear in the assigned location SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 418 InMail Upload Download Audio I ...

Страница 431: ... access the trunk This feature provides a user information which can determine whether they should use the Barge In feature for the extension or trunk This information automatically displays for a Multiline Terminal once programmed Conditions Preventing ICM calls does not affect dialing other service codes including 000 Intercom calls can ring or be voice announced at the called extension Intercom...

Страница 432: ...15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service In tercom Calls COS 01 15 1 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Pro tect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller COS 01 15 0 20 11 07 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Without Holding COS 01 15 0 20 13 22 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy Status Dis...

Страница 433: ...to Table 1 40 Incoming Ringing Tone on page 1 421 Table 1 40 Incoming Ringing Tone Incoming Ring Tone Number Tone Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 2 Trunk Incom ing High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 3 Trunk Incoming...

Страница 434: ...ne rings lift the handset To check the extension data Multiline Terminal only 1 Press Help key 2 Dial the extension number You display shows your telephone extension number port number and extension Department Group You can also check any other extension numbers information by pressing Help key the extension number 3 Press Exit key to return the normal time date display To change how Intercom call...

Страница 435: ...ine Terminal uses an RJ 45 for connection to the IP network rather than an RJ 61 connection to a 084M or 080E LAN Connection The IP Terminal has two RJ 45 connections on the back marked PC and LAN This allows the IP Terminal and a PC to share one cable run and switch port If installing an IP Terminal at a location that has a PC connected to the data network one of the following methods can be used...

Страница 436: ...e SL1100 the network administrator can place the CPU and the VoIPDB in the customers LAN while still making it accessible to users outside the local LAN Static NAT This method is used to convert an address a WAN side address for the NAT router previously specified in the terminal configuration For this method a conversion table is statically set up for the NAT router and then a packet for a specif...

Страница 437: ...AT Mode 6 15 05 45 1 1 NAT RTP send port choice 8 84 26 01 172 16 0 20 172 16 0 20 VOIP DSP IP address Table 1 42 Example IP Terminal Setting Index Name Default Input Data 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 172 17 0 100 2 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 172 17 0 254 3 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 4 NAT Traversal Mode 1 Disable 2 Dynamic 5 WAN Mate IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 1 6 WAN SIP Mate Port 5060 5080 Table 1 43 ...

Страница 438: ... List Dir ICM Peer to Peer An IP Terminal can send and receive RTP packets to from another IP Terminal without using the DSP resources on the VoIPDB This operation only allows intercom calls between the IP Terminals If a digital multiline terminal or trunk is part of the call a DSP resource on the VoIPDB is required If while on a peer to peer call a conference call is initiated the peer to peer co...

Страница 439: ... different ports are used in the system Even though all three can be assigned the same user name and password Registration Override When Manual mode is used Registration Override can be used Registration Override allows a user to login at one phone and later login at another phone and keep the same extension number This is useful in the case where an office user has an IP Multiline Terminal at wor...

Страница 440: ...mended The same Trunk Line assignment squared key system The same Virtual Extension assignment Paging key with LED ON assignment The same location Park key The same BLF key assignment Day Night Mode Change key assignment The same VM Mail Box key assignment Trunk Group key Trunk Group All Line Busy Indication One call cannot ring more than 8 simultaneous IP extensions at the same time if the call o...

Страница 441: ...erride Mode 0 15 05 45 NAT RTP Send Port Number Selection Effective only when PRG 10 46 14 is set to NAT mode Select sending RTP port number to remote Router use from negotiation result 0 or received RTP packet 1 1 84 10 01 ToS Setup ToS Mode 0 84 10 07 ToS Setup Priority D S C P Differentiated Services Code Point 0 84 22 01 DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup User ID No setting 84 22 02 DR700...

Страница 442: ... 10 46 06 DR700 Server Information Setup Register Port 5080 10 46 13 DR700 Server Information Setup Subscribe Session Port 5081 10 46 14 DR700 Server Information Setup NAT Mode 0 84 26 01 VoIPDB Basic Setup IP Address 172 16 0 20 84 26 02 VoIPDB Basic Setup RTP Port Number VoIP GW1 10020 84 26 03 VoIPDB Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Num ber 1 VoIP GW1 10021 In addition to the above program...

Страница 443: ...vailable for a wired phone in addition to its roaming and handover capabilities Unlike other in building wireless solutions for the SL1100 the ML440 is an integrated multiline handset capable of supporting the key elements of a SMB mobile solution A complete list of supported features can be found below Basic Operation Status LED Earpiece Wrist strap anchor Belt clip holes Headset jack UP DOWN MUT...

Страница 444: ...system the AP20 supports up to 10 simultaneous voice paths The ML440 and AP20 system uses NEC i SIP for SL1100 The ML440 and AP20 system supports the G 711 CODEC only The ML440 Handset does not support the Live Monitor feature The line keys on the ML440 correspond to Line Keys 1 4 in PRG 15 07 01 or 15 13 01 and 15 13 02 for that phones extension number The three dedicated Soft Keys are predefined...

Страница 445: ...wer Hold Automatic Hold No Attendant Call Queuing No Automatic Call Distribution ACD Yes V1 5 Added Automatic Release N A Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Yes Background Music No Barge In Yes Can monitor but cannot use the microphone toggle fea ture The handset mute button is the only way to mute audio from handset during monitoring Built in Automated Attendant N A Call Arrival CAR Keys Yes C...

Страница 446: ...nce Yes Conference Remote N A Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Yes Continued Dialing N A Data Line Security Yes Delayed Ringing Yes Department Calling Yes Department Step Calling Yes DHCP Client N A Dial Pad Confirmation Tone No Dial Tone Detection No Dialing Number Preview No This is a function of the ML440 Handset Direct Inward Dialing DID Yes Direct Inward Line DIL Yes Direct Inward System...

Страница 447: ... No InMail Yes Voice mail Soft Keys are not provided to ML440 Live Monitor is not supported Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID Cascade Message Notification Email Notification Find Me Follow Me Language Setting Park and Page Upload Download Audio N A Intercom Yes IP Multiline Station SIP Yes IP Single Line Terminal SIP N A IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol N A IP Trunk H 323 N A ISDN Compat...

Страница 448: ... page information Paging External VRS N A Paging Internal Yes A ML440 can only initiate an Internal External or All Call Page It cannot receive either Internal or All Call pages or display page information Park Yes PBX Compatibility Behind PBX Yes PC Programming Yes Intuition Setup Power Failure Transfer No Prime Line Selection Yes Prime Line Selection can be assigned for a ML440 however when this...

Страница 449: ...es Tandem Ringing No Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference Yes The unsupervised conference will be disconnected au tomatically based on PRG 24 02 07 TAPI Compatibility No Tone Override Yes Transfer Yes Trunk Group Routing Yes Trunk Groups Yes Trunk Queuing Camp On No Unicast Multicast Paging Mode Uniform Call Distribution UCD Yes User Programming Ability Yes Virtual Extension Yes Voice Mail Inte...

Страница 450: ...12 09 IP Address Set or Verify IP for VOIPDB 172 16 0 10 10 13 01 DHCP Server Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 10 13 02 Lease Time Days 0 255 Hour 0 23 default Day 0 Hour 0 10 13 05 Last DHCP Data 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 10 26 04 IP System Operation Setup DR700 Peer to Peer Mode 0 Off 1 On default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key to terminals Refer to Programming M...

Страница 451: ...LL Calls 3 Call Forward No Answer Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only default Not Assigned 24 09 04 CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination This is used to set the stations forwarding destination number for Trunk Calls if the called station is in a Busy state Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supe...

Страница 452: ...ogram Name Default 84 26 03 VoIPDB Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Num ber 1 VoIP GW1 10021 Operation Refer to the ML440 User Guide for detailed operation information SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 440 IP Multiline SIP ML440 I ...

Страница 453: ...d to provide toll quality equivalent speech path The following voice compression methods are supported for the IP Station SIP feature G 711 μ Law Highest Bandwidth G 722 Wideband G 729 Mid Range Bandwidth For the minimum bandwidth requirements for each voice call refer to Table 1 46 Minimum Bandwidth Requirements on page 1 441 This includes all the overhead of VoIP communication including signalin...

Страница 454: ...Technical Documentation Telephony Polycom Soundstation valid Username and Password required SIP Stations which support RFC 3842 Message Waiting receive Message Waiting Lamp indications SIP Station VoIPDB does not support NAT traversal SIP Station VoIPDB does not support a Blind Transfer feature Supports video codecs H 264 H 263 and H 261 Video is supported when P2P for standard SIP is turned on PR...

Страница 455: ...c Display Yes Some SIP devices have Alphanumeric Displays and are backlit However the display is not upda ted with CPU messages Analog Communications Interface ACI No Ancillary Device Connection No Answer Hold Automatic Hold No Attendant Call Queuing No Automatic Call Distribution ACD No V1 5 Added Automatic Release Yes Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Yes Background Music No Barge In No Call...

Страница 456: ... Yes Barge In is not supported Delayed Ringing No Department Calling No Department Step Calling No Dial Pad Confirmation Tone No Dial Tone Detection No Dialing Number Preview Yes Direct Inward Dialing DID Yes Direct Inward Line DIL Yes Direct Inward System Access DISA No Direct Station Selection DSS Con sole No Directed Call Pickup Yes Directory Dialing No Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patte...

Страница 457: ... Me Paging Yes Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes A SIP device can receive a Meet Me Paging Transfer but it cannot originate a Meet Me Paging transfer call Memo Dial No Message Waiting No Microphone Cutoff Yes Microphone Cutoff is a function of the SIP device Multiple Trunk Types Yes Music on Hold Yes Name Storing No Night Service No Off Hook Signaling No One Touch Calling No Operator Yes Paging External...

Страница 458: ...ncoming Extension No Secretary Call Buzzer No Secretary Call Pickup No Selectable Display Messaging No Selectable Ring Tones Yes Selectable Ring Tones is a function of the client device Serial Call No Single Line Terminals No Softkeys No Station Hunt No Station Message Detail Recording Yes Station Name Assignment User Programmable No Station Relocation No T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Com patibility Y...

Страница 459: ...ired Component s CPU VoIPDB SL IP SIPEXT 1 LIC License Code 5111 Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming VoIP Settings Program Num ber Program Name Default 10 12 03 CPU Network Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 CPU Network Setup IP Address 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Resource 1 1 Resource 2 32 0 10 26 01 IP Sys...

Страница 460: ...CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jit ter Buffer max 80 ms 84 19 07 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 729 Audio Frames 2 20 ms 84 19 08 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 84 19 09 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Jit ter Buffer min 20 ms 84 19 10 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G729 Jitter Buffer av...

Страница 461: ...tocol mode 1 84 19 52 Fax Max Rate 5 84 19 56 Low Speed Data Redundancy 0 84 19 57 High Speed Data Redundancy 0 84 19 58 TCF Handling 1 84 19 61 T 38 RTP Format Payload Number 100 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Program Num ber Program Name Default 84 20 01 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Registrar Proxy Port 5070 84 20 02 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Session Timer Value 180 s...

Страница 462: ...PDB Subnet Mask Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 SIP Softphone SIP Terminal VoIPDB Switch Hub Figure 1 27 Example SIP Terminal The following menu items require programming in your SIP IP Terminal consult SIP Terminal vendor specific documentation Program Item No Description Selection Default Assigned Data Comments 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter a Static IP Address for the SIP T...

Страница 463: ...election Default Assigned Data Comments 5 Extension Number 0 Assign the SIP Terminal extension This infor mation must match PRG 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 451 I ...

Страница 464: ...sages is formatted using the E 164 international numbering scheme Specifically the system is able to handle the digit when required as the International Access Code For example a normal international SIP call could be dialed and presented from the system as follows Number dialed 00441202223344 Request URI Invite sip 00441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 However with SIP Trunk E 164 Support enabled ...

Страница 465: ...d to VBD Codec V2 0 or higher Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s SL IP SIPTRK 1 LIC License Code 5001 CPU with VoIPDB installed Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default Note 10 02 01 Location Setup Country Code None V2 0 Added 10 02 02 Location Setup Internal Access Code 00 V2 0 Added 10 02 ...

Страница 466: ...ar IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 29 07 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar Port Number 5060 10 29 08 SIP Server Information Setup DNS Server Mode 0 10 29 09 SIP Server Information Setup DNS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 29 10 SIP Server Information Setup DNS Port Number 53 10 29 11 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar Domain Name None 10 29 12 SIP Server Information Setup Domain Name None 10 29 13 SIP...

Страница 467: ...ty D S C P Differentiated Services Code Point 0 84 13 01 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frame 2 84 13 02 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Silence Detection VAD Mode 0 84 13 03 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Type 1 84 13 04 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buf fer Minimum 20 84 13 05 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Set...

Страница 468: ...P Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup T 38 Protocol mode 1 84 13 52 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Fax Max Rate 5 84 13 56 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Low Speed Data Redundancy 0 84 13 57 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup High Speed Da ta Rebundancy 0 84 13 58 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup TCF Handling 1 84 13 61 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup T 38 RTP...

Страница 469: ...044 1202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 0044 1202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 44 1509555123 172 16 0 10 2 00 Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Asserted Identity P Asserted Identity 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Preferred Identity P Preferred Identity 441509555...

Страница 470: ...l access code value in PRG 10 02 02 only Or With a SIP INVITE for incoming calls When a is presented as the international access code along with a country code that DOES match the value in PRG 10 02 01 then delete the and country code but DO NOT add the international ac cess code value Example Output Incoming call from 4902131795770 PRG 10 02 02 00 Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as ...

Страница 471: ...s the international access code along with a country code that DOES match the value in PRG 10 02 01 then delete the and country code but DO NOT add the international ac cess code value Example Output Incoming call from 4902131795770 PRG 10 02 02 00 PRG 10 02 03 9 Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as 01 4902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL Original 01 004902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL PR...

Страница 472: ...twork A system wide name can be programmed to be sent over the network or the name can be defined on a per station basis If both are programmed the system wide name takes priority over the station name SMDR Includes Dialed Number The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name entered in system programming or the number the incoming caller dialed i e the dialed ISDN digits This gives you the o...

Страница 473: ...eceiving the name from the Network in supported formats only and cannot send the Calling Name Refer to Table 1 48 Restrictions for Calling Party Names on page 1 461 Table 1 48 Restrictions for Calling Party Names Protocols Name Delivery Formats NI 2 Facility Information Elements 4ESS AT T Custom Not Supported AT T 5ESS Lucent Custom Facility Information Element DMS 100 Custom Display Information E...

Страница 474: ...ing on TK009 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 Incoming call from the Network on Channel 23 In most cases the Network will control select the B Channel used for an incoming call Outgoing Call Trunk Number Trunk Group Trunk Priority B Channel Number 9 1 9 1 10 1 8 2 11 1 7 3 12 1 6 4 13 1 5 5 14 1 4 6 15 1 3 7 16 1 2 8 17 1 1 9 18 2 3 10 19 2 2 11 20 2 ...

Страница 475: ...the SL1100 to edit the Calling Party Name information SL1100 does not support ISDN sub addressing Default Settings None System Availability Terminals Not Applicable Required Component s To provide ISDN PRI trunk connection 1PRIU C1 Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Forced Trunk Disconnect Station Message De...

Страница 476: ...If the SL1100 was set to receive 4 digits and the Telco sent 10 digits 214 555 1000 the SL1100 would route off of the last 4 digits re ceived 1000 1 8 default 4 22 13 01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Per day night mode a translation area must be assigned to the trunk group This will allow for DID s to route to different places in day night modes 0 No Routing 1 20 Table Area assig...

Страница 477: ... is programmed on both the trunk and station when a call is made the CPN from the station will be sent to the Telco Maximum of 16 digits 0 9 Most Telco s will only accept 10 digits default Not Assigned 21 13 01 ISDN CPN setup for Stations This program is used to assign a calling party number per station If CPN information is programmed on both the trunk and station when a call is made the CPN from...

Страница 478: ...recedence over any setting in PRG 15 01 01 Maximum of 12 digits 0 9 default Not Assigned 20 19 09 System Calling Party Name When a name is programmed in this program this will be the name sent out for all callers that have PRG 15 01 10 enabled Maximum of 12 digits 0 9 default Not Assigned 10 03 05 ISDN Clip Information This program allows denies the sending of calling party name number information...

Страница 479: ... to assign a DID translation table to one of the 500 entries in PRG 22 17 01 per day night mode This can be done automatically following the system day night modes or manually via a function key 1 800 These are the table entries in PRG 22 11 default Not Assigned 22 11 01 Received Number DO NOT assign anything here for the tables specified in PRG 22 17 04 This must be left blank or the DDI routing ...

Страница 480: ... Keypad Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element In PRG 14 05 01 assign PRI lines to trunk groups determines available channels for PRI lines In PRG 21 01 03 enter the interval for the trunk interdigit timer Is the amount of time the system waits before placing the call in a talk state sufficient Go To A In PRG 20 19 04 set the timer to 0 PRG 20 19 04 set the timer to a...

Страница 481: ...RG 35 02 16 enter 0 to print the trunk port name assigned in PRG 14 01 01 or enter 1 to print the received dialed number In PRG 22 02 01 enter 0 Should all PRI Trunks ring the same extensions In PRG 22 02 01 enter 3 Refer to the Programming Manual or Networking Manual In PRG 22 05 01 assign all the trunks on a PRI ETU to the same Ring Group In PRG 14 07 01 and PRG 15 06 01 set up the trunk Access ...

Страница 482: ...change to a unique alarm sound In PRG 22 01 02 Enter 1 Also set the interval in PRG 22 01 03 Do you want to change the way PRI calls ring telephones Change the Ring Tone Range in PRG 22 03 01 and PRG 15 02 02 the tones within each range in PRG 82 01 01 and the ring cadence in PRG 20 15 01 Adjust the CODEC Gain in PRG 14 01 02 transmit and PRG 14 01 03 receive Trunks Do you want to adjust the gain ...

Страница 483: ... Overlap In PRG 10 03 09 select either Keypad Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element PRG 20 08 02 enter 1 to enable outgoing calls Should system users be able to place outgoing calls on trunks In PRG 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions In PRG 20 08 02 enter 0 to disable outgoing calls In PRG 20 08 01 ebter 0 to disable calling number display by Telco Should...

Страница 484: ... 14 01 07 enter 1 to allow outgoing calls In PRG 14 05 01 assign PRI trunks to trunk groups This determines available channels for PRI trunks Do you need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks In the default program extensions Build an out going restriction matrix In PRG 14 07 01 for each Access Map select the access options for each trunk In PRG 15 06 01 assign extens...

Страница 485: ...Trunk Route Access Is Trunk Group Routing defined In PRG 11 01 01 set up a Service Code for Altemate Trunk Route Access For example to make 50 the Altemate Trunk Route Access Code DIAL 5 Digit 2 Kind 8 In PRG 21 15 01 enter the extension number and enter 0 to prevent routing In PRG 15 07 01 do not assign function key as line keys In PRG 21 01 03 enter the interval for the trunk interdigit timer In...

Страница 486: ...ansfer This feature is not supported with Unsupervised Conference This feature is only supported with a Manual Transfer This feature is only supported when both trunks are ISDN PRI and the bearer capability of the two trunks meet the same service requirements Trunk to Trunk programming must be enabled for this feature to work Both ISDN PRI trunks must reside in the same system for this feature to ...

Страница 487: ...er COS 1 15 0 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Trans fer Restriction COS 1 15 0 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up COS 1 15 0 20 25 15 ISDN Options Call Reference Selection for PRI 2 B Channel Transfer 0 24 02 09 System Options for Transfer Two B Channel Transfer Retry Timer 10 Operation To Perfor...

Страница 488: ... redial the number displayed or enter a System Speed Dialing bin number to be dialed Pressing the Redial key repeatedly will scroll through the last 10 numbers dialed Cursor Key Operation In a case of standard mode PRG 15 02 60 is set 0 by pressing the Left Cursor key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History menus The flow chart below shows the menu access sequence If the terminal ...

Страница 489: ...ice Options Outgoing Call Service Dial Number Preview Preset Dial COS 01 15 1 Operation To redial your last call When set PRG 15 02 60 0 1 Without lifting the handset press the Redial key The last dialed number is displayed 2 To redial the last number dial OR Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing the Redial or VOLUME or key OR Press the Left Cursor key once and the VOLUME ...

Страница 490: ... Speaker key or lift handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 To Clear all the stored number dial 776 To redial the last number you can do the following When set PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 1 Press the Right Cursor key once and the Up or Down Cursor key to find number 2 After the number been selected you can make a call by following ways Press Speaker key Lift the Handset Press the Right ...

Страница 491: ...tored number dials out if you Lift the handset or Press Speaker key 2 Press Exit key To erase the stored number 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or lift handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 To clear all stored number dial 776 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 479 L ...

Страница 492: ...Find Me Follow Me Password option Hotel Motel Applications Desktop Application Softphone This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be used for Softphone Desktop Client This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be run 60 Day Free License The 60 Day Free License comes with the CPU It allows for all the features to be active for 60 days The count down starts on the fir...

Страница 493: ...ified when the License was generated the system resets when it is applied Hold key pressed not when exiting program mode When the system time turns to midnight of the End Date the system resets and comes back with no licenses The recovery license can be activated only from PCPro or WebPro not a Multiline Terminal If any CPU license is activated when the recovery licensing is being used the CPU lic...

Страница 494: ...Off V1 5 Added 5001 SL IP SIPTRK 1 LIC 1 32 5111 SL IP SIPEXT 1 LIC 1 64 5201 SL SYS MOBILE 1 LIC 1 32 5102 5501 5505 SL DT DESKTOP SUITE 1 LIC This license bundles Softphone Client 5501 IP Port Softphone only 5102 and Desktop Client 5505 1 64 V1 5 Added Operation There are four different ways to activate the licenses in the system Manual Enter Software Key Code 1 In PRG 10 48 01 enter the Softwar...

Страница 495: ... File 6 Select the location of the license file to upload Auto Register the License for the System 1 Connect to the system 2 Go to the Feature Activation screen 3 Enter email Address and Password 4 Add Software Key code s If left blank it registers all attached licenses for the Hardware Key code 5 Click on Auto Register ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 483 L ...

Страница 496: ...reference the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either trunk dial 0 or Intercom dial tone Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines With Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions not their own This would hel...

Страница 497: ... Trunk Line Preference 0 15 02 10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls 1 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions 1 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answer Service Automatic Off Hook Answer COS 01 15 0 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Pri ority 1 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension 101 108 first eight ports ri...

Страница 498: ...ions Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Featu...

Страница 499: ...lass of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming COS 01 15 0 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing COS 01 15 0 20 21 03 System Options for Long Conversation Long Conversa tion Cutoff for Incoming Call 0 seconds 20 21 04 System Options for Long Conversation Long Conversa tion Cutoff for Outgoing Call 0 seconds Operat...

Страница 500: ...op keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and don t separate keys for incoming and outgoing calls Both Ways loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls An extension can have many loop keys of any type You can program an operator for example with four loop keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing calls Once a loop key call is set up the user can handle it ...

Страница 501: ...cess DISA Transferred DID DIL and DISA calls do not require ring group programming Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default Note 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 84 Priority 1 84 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Access Map 1 84 Trunk Ports 1 84 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 06 01 Trunk Acces...

Страница 502: ...l calls waiting to be answered your display shows WAITING LOOP KEY To program a loop key 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 852 3 Press the key you want to program as a loop key 4 Dial 05 5 Dial the loop key type 0 Incoming only 1 Outgoing only 2 Both ways incoming and outgoing 6 Dial the loop key routing option for incoming outgoing or incoming and outgoing calls 000 Trunk Group Routing or ARS if ins...

Страница 503: ...can display alarm data If need be an option in PCPro allows the technician to reset or initialize the system remotely If the technician determines the problem is isolated to a specific slot PCPro can reset only the slot in question Quick System Check up You can check the System Information VoIPDB Information and IP Address by doing a simple operation Here are the information you can get from the o...

Страница 504: ...unk is not analog trunk ERROR will be displayed on the LCD of the programming terminal Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals None Required Component s None Related Features None Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 81 07 CODEC Filter Type 0 90 68 01 Adjustment Start No setting 90 68 02 1 digit data 0 Operation None SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 492 Maintenance M ...

Страница 505: ...al or external parties conferenced up to the block limit of 16 Conditions None Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Conference Meet Me Paging Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default Note 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 20 06 01 Class o...

Страница 506: ... on a call hookflash and dial 1 2 Dial Paging code Internal 701 External 703 or Combined 1 and the Paging Zone 3 Announce the zone 4 When a co worker answers your page press hookflash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me External Conference 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At a Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 765 3 Dial the anno...

Страница 507: ... add To join a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or lift the handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 if your extension is in the zone called ISS...

Страница 508: ...in in the conversation Conditions With Meet Me Paging Transfer a user can page a co worker and have the call automatically transfer when the co worker answers the page An extension access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging feature Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals Multiline Terminal...

Страница 509: ...p 1 Port 17 0 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving 0 For additional programming information on Paging refer to Paging External on page 1 559 and Paging Internal on page 1 564 features Operation Meet Me External Page To make a Meet Me External Page 1 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or pick up the handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset...

Страница 510: ...unce the zone To join a Meet Me Internal Page 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or pick up the handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 23 if your extension is in the zone c...

Страница 511: ...call and up to 31 other inside parties An extension user can Page a co worker and meet with them on a page zone With External Paging an extension user can broadcast an announcement over paging equipment connected to external paging zones Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other Multiline Terminals Function keys simplify Meet Me Paging Transfer operation Default Setting...

Страница 512: ...ternal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Refer to Programming Manual For additional programming information on Paging refer to the Paging External on page 1 559 and Paging Internal on page 1 564 features Operation Meet Me External Paging Transfer To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 At the Multiline Terminal while on a call press Hold key OR At the Single Line Terminal while...

Страница 513: ...fer key OR From a Single Line Terminal when the paged party answers hang up The party is transferred To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or pick up handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Mee...

Страница 514: ...al digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions When Memo Dial calls out it outdials the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Only one number can be stored at a time If a number is already stored in Memo Dial and you are on an internal or external call and the Dial Memo Key is pressed the n...

Страница 515: ...emo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Memo Dial key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 31 3 Press Speaker key The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number OR Press the line key The stored number dials out To check to see the stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Memo Dial key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 31 The stored number displays To cancel...

Страница 516: ...minder messages require a DSP daughter board for VRS messages When a user responds to a Message Waiting the system does not cancel the Message Waiting LED if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback The system cancels the indication only if the called party lifts the handset or presses Speaker key With the Hotel Motel set up an employee with a Multiline Terminal can send a Message Waiting to a r...

Страница 517: ...cel Message Waiting 771 11 16 07 Single Digit Service Code Setup Message Wait ing 0 15 02 28 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Color 1 15 02 35 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Calling Extension 3 15 02 36 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension 2 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Vo...

Страница 518: ...ve them a message Normally your Message Waiting LED goes out If it continues to flash you have new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox or a new General Message See To check your messages below To answer a Message Waiting When VM Message Exist If there is a VM message and a Message Waiting set on the same extension and the user dials 0 it will call the VM pilot because VM has a higher priority To c...

Страница 519: ... table on your telephone If you see You have VOICE MESSAGE n MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox CHECK MESSAGE VRS GENERAL MESSAGE A General message in Voice Mail that has not been heard CHECK MESSAGE name Message Waiting requests left at your telephone by your co workers 3 Press VOL or to scroll through your display 4 When you find the message you want to answer press Speaker key You ...

Страница 520: ... off handsfree microphone When using the Handset Off Hook Mute key turns off Handset microphone When using the Headset Mute key turns off Headset microphone Default Settings Enabled using Mute key System Availability Terminals Any Multiline Terminal Required Component s None Related Features Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Handset Mute Handset Cutoff Programmable Function Keys Guide t...

Страница 521: ...free microphone while on a call 1 Press Mute key To turn your telephone microphone back on 1 Press Mute key Use Mute key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 509 M ...

Страница 522: ...or the trunks used for this feature The Mobile extension internal extension number Proxy Port is linked to a speed dial bin to provide integration If all external trunks are busy when a call is made to the mobile extension ringback tone is presented giving the impression the phone is ringing A DID is directed to the Mobile Extension internal extension number Proxy Port and to provide internal dial...

Страница 523: ... Mode Switching for Other Group 11 10 12 618 Yes Call Forward All 11 11 01 741 Yes Yes Call Forward Busy 11 11 02 742 Yes Yes Call Forward No Answer 11 11 03 743 Yes Yes Call Forward Busy No Answer 11 11 04 744 Yes Yes Call Forward Both Ring 11 11 05 745 Yes Yes Call Forward Follow Me 11 11 07 746 Yes Yes Do Not Disturb 11 11 08 747 Yes Answer Message Waiting 11 11 09 0 Yes Cancel All Messages Wai...

Страница 524: ...11 12 25 756 Yes Yes Call Pickup for Specified Group 11 12 26 768 Yes Yes Call Pickup 11 12 27 Yes Yes Call Pickup for Another Group 11 12 28 769 Yes Yes Direct Extension Call Pickup 11 12 29 Yes Park Hold 11 12 31 6 Yes Answer for Park Hold 11 12 32 6 Yes Group Hold 11 12 33 732 Yes Answer for Group Hold 11 12 34 762 Yes Personal Extension Park 11 12 35 757 Yes Door Box Access Door Box can also r...

Страница 525: ...in any case The features to be disabled not used for Mobile Extension include ACD V1 5 or higher H 323 Trunks Analog Trunks Port Swap Hotline General Message Message Waiting Headset Mode for SLT Flexible Transfer Virtual Loop Back Tandem Ringing Virtual extension key as Call Coverage Key for mobile extension Automatic Conversation Record for trunks Caller ID Presented to the Mobile Extension for T...

Страница 526: ...PRG 80 03 03 must be set to allow a minimum detection level of 25dBm This entry is dependent on the Detect Level selected in PRG 80 03 01 The Mobile Extension uses the to perform a flash so any service codes which begin with must be changed PRG 11 10 PRG 11 11 PRG 11 12 PRG 11 13 To provide a proper disconnect Disconnect Supervision is required for the trunks used for this feature When an entry is...

Страница 527: ...umbering Assign a valid extension number to a port that is not currently used by existing hardware The extension numbers assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG 11 01 01 Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default Station Port No 1 84 Ex tension Number 101 184 11 13 Service Code Setup for ACD Customize the service codes for ACD Please refer to the SL1100 Programming Manual for more informatio...

Страница 528: ... the mobile extension to call forward no answer to the voice mail pilot number 0 No Call Forwarding 1 Call Forward Both 2 Call Forward No Answer 3 Call Forward All 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer 5 Call Forward Busy default 0 24 09 02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer This is used to set the stations forwarding destina tion number for Trunk Calls in one of the following...

Страница 529: ...ired to set this value to a setting data of 1 5 dBm 30 dBm if the user cannot press the key to answer the call 0 0 25 dBm 1 5 30 dBm 2 10 35 dBm 3 15 40 dBm 4 20 45 dBm 5 25 50 dBm 6 30 55 dBm default 0 14 01 24 Trunk to Trunk Outgoing Caller ID through Mode This command is for PRI and SIP trunks only and should never be enabled on any other trunk type When this command is enabled the system will ...

Страница 530: ...answer programming ring another extension forward to SL1100 voice mail etc PRG 15 22 02 set to 2 No DTMF Confirmation Required The caller is forwarded to the external extension voice mail if available Placing a Call from the Mobile Extension 1 Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry PRG 13 04 and PRG 15...

Страница 531: ...r for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry PRG 13 04 and PRG 15 22 internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user OR When activating Call Forwarding to the Mobile Extension Press the CALL key or lift the handset 2 Dial the service code defined in PRG 11 11 01 PRG 11 11 05 and PRG 11 11 07 3 Dial Call Forwarding condition 1 Set 0 C...

Страница 532: ...matches the Speed Dial bin entry PRG 13 04 and PRG 15 22 internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user OR When activating Call Forwarding to the Mobile Extension Press the SPK key or lift the handset 2 Dial 846 3 Dial 0 4 Dial destination Station to Cancel Forward Follow Me extension or dial 0 to cancel all 5 Dial 0 from Mobile Extension only 6 Hang up SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 520 Mobile Exte...

Страница 533: ...as a normal Mobile Extension call Callback to Mobile Phone will not proceed and no retry is made if all trunks are busy when trying to callback Callback trunk routing follows PRG 15 22 03 setting When set 0 Normal trunk access code ARS also can be used If Mobile Extension does not answer the Callback within time set in PRG 20 01 16 Callback will stop If answered the within the Callback time the us...

Страница 534: ...ct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Station Message Detail Recording Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data No Setting 13 04 03 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer Mode 0 13 04 04 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer Destination Number No Setting 14 01 30 Basic Trunk Data Setup Flexible Ringing by Ca...

Страница 535: ...01 Extension Dial Tone Time 30 seconds 1 Call the system Trk1 from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension Ex 150 2 The Mobile Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds before system answers 3 System makes the Callback to the cell phone 4 Answer the Mobile Phone within 15 seconds 5 Mobile Phone hears a dial tone and dials before 30 seconds Receive call from Mobile Extension but system answered 1 C...

Страница 536: ...e Mobile Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds before system answers 3 System makes the Callback to the Mobile Phone 4 The Mobile Phone answers within 15 seconds 5 The Mobile Phone hears a dial tone but does not send any DTMF within 30 seconds 6 System disconnects the call SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 524 Mobile Extension Callback to Mobile Phone M ...

Страница 537: ...formation T1 E1 Trunks The T1 PRI E1 Interface gives the system T1 E1 trunking ability This unit uses a single universal slot and provides up to 24 30 trunk circuits In additional to providing digital quality trunking the T1 PRI Interface allows you to have maximum trunking ability with fewer units This in turn makes more universal slots available for other functions Conditions When adding or remo...

Страница 538: ...r 001 084 Trunk Name 001 084 25 07 01 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Dial Tone Time 10 34 01 02 Receive Dial Type 1 Loop Start Trunks Program Num ber Program Name Default 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 84 Priority 1 84 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 0 Operation None SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 526 Multiple Trunk Types M ...

Страница 539: ...rce There are 4 options available PRG 10 04 01 PRG 10 04 02 Internal Music Tune The tune is set by PRG 10 04 02 External Source ACI input via audio connector J421 MOH SL1100 PRG 10 60 01 Silence Callers on hold hear silence Hold Message Embedded VRS Program 10 04 01 Music on Hold per DDI Number The music on hold source can be selected for individual DDI numbers by PRG 22 11 09 There are 3 options ...

Страница 540: ...ture to be enabled Program Number Program Name Description Assigned Data 10 04 01 Music on Hold Source Selection Assign the systems Music on Hold Source 0 Internal MOH Tone set by PRG 10 04 02 1 External MOH Tone set by PRG 10 60 01 Audio Port No 2 2 Service Tone Tone set by PRG 80 01 tone 64 3 VMDB Tone set by PRG 10 04 02 default 2 10 04 02 Music on Hold Tone Selection Select the different inter...

Страница 541: ... Hold 1 Background Music default 0 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Specify the amount of times tone 64 Music on Hold will repeat itself 0 Endless Tone is constantly played 1 255 1 255 times default 0 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number For tone 64 Music on Hold specify the basic tone that the user will hear For a complete list of tones refer to the programming manual 0 No Tone 1...

Страница 542: ...h can be used These characters are available with any option which allows Name Storing Speed Dial System Group Station One Touch Keys Extension Name Trunk Naming Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line extensions cannot program names If a name is not assigned to the Extension Virtual Extension it does not show in the Extension Directory Extension Directo...

Страница 543: ...COS 01 15 1 Operation Refer to Table 1 53 Keys for Entering Names on page 1 531 for and explanation for using the keypad to enter names Table 1 53 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o ...

Страница 544: ... History Navigation mode 2 Advanced mode 2 None Directory Di aling DSX Incoming call History Outgoing call History Soft Key mode DSX During entering one of above features if PRG 15 02 60 is changed to other mode it is necessary to make the terminal back to idle state before using new feature Warning Tone and Confirming Tone can be heard by setup of PRG 15 02 48 Navigation mode Navigation mode prov...

Страница 545: ...ess If multiple persons save the data at the same time same vacant bin number is used so last saved data will be valid Pressing the Center Cursor key during terminal is idle user can enter Navigation mode If the terminal has incoming call or ICM Hold it can not enter the mode When set in Advanced mode 1 or 2 even terminal idle BGM volume will not change by up down cursor key To change BGM volume i...

Страница 546: ...Ring Options 531 Ringing Voice Call 532 Ringing Volume 533 Ring Tones 540 Key Touch Tone 550 Headset 551 Headset Ringing Volume 560 Key Assignment 600 System Setting 610 System Time 620 System Date 810 Phone 830 VoipDB 840 IP Address 100 Call History 200 Contacts 400 User Features 500 Phone Setting 530 540 550 and 560 600 System Setting and 800 Properties are supported V2 0 or higher Short Cut Cod...

Страница 547: ...24 Backlight Threshold 525 Auto Backlight 530 Ring Options 531 Ringing Voice Call V2 0 Added 532 Ringing Volume V2 0 Added 533 Ring Tones V2 0 Added 540 Key Touch Tone V2 0 Added 550 Headset 551 Headset Ringing Volume V2 0 Added 560 Key Assignment 561 Key01 V2 0 Added V2 0 Added 56 Key24 V2 0 Added 600 System Setting 610 System Time 611 Edit V2 0 Added 612 Save V2 0 Added 613 Cancel V2 0 Added 620...

Страница 548: ...ey DSX mode after pressing menu Soft Key then by dialing number of specific feature directly menu screen can move to required feature See the table shown below for dial number of each feature Table 1 54 Movement on screen from Menu Dial pad Changing Menu screen Dial 1 0 Volume Preference Dial 1 1 Volume Ring Dial 1 2 Volume Off Hook Ring Dial 2 0 Display Preferences Dial 2 1 Display Contrast Dial ...

Страница 549: ...ed Dial Speed Dial Number Speed Dial Name Dial 8 0 Name and Language Dial 8 1 Extension Name Dial 8 2 Display Language Dial 9 0 Option Preferences Dial 9 1 Option Preferences Headset Mode Dial 9 2 Option Preferences Headset V Announce Dial 9 3 Option Preferences System Information Dial 9 4 Option Preferences VoIPDB Information Dial 9 5 Option Preferences Backlight Threshold Dial 9 6 IP Addres Info...

Страница 550: ...1 13 01 03 Number of Common Speed Dial bin 900 13 02 Group Speed Dial bin 0 13 03 Speed Dial Group Assignment for Extensions 1 13 04 01 Speed Dialing data no setting 13 04 02 Name no setting 13 06 01 Private Speed Dial Number and Name no setting 15 01 01 Extension Name no setting 15 02 13 Redial List Mode 1 15 02 48 Short Ring Setup 0 20 07 04 Common group abbreviated dial registration 1 20 08 03 ...

Страница 551: ... shows Call history mode 110 Call History 1 3 Missed Call xx Received Call This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 4 Press Enter Cursor key to show Missed Call list Top Left Caller Name Number Top Right Number of Missed Call Bottom Left Navigation Number Bottom Center Month Date Time 111 Missed Call xx xx nnnnnnnn APR MON 02 06 55AM This display indication is for IP and Multiline...

Страница 552: ...8 Press Enter Cursor key to check the number Private Phonebook x x Dial nnnnnnnn Name zzzzzzzz This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 9 Press Enter Cursor key to enter the name to be associated with the stored number Private Phonebook x x Name zzzzzzzz Bin XXX This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 10 Press Enter Cursor key to show next available Bin number au...

Страница 553: ...Terminals xx List Number 3 Press the Down Cursor key to select Contacts The display shows 200 Operation List 2 6 Contacts User Features This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 4 Press Enter Cursor key to select Search Contact 210 Contcts 1 3 Search Contact New Contact This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 5 Press Enter Cursor key to show the search mode 211 Se...

Страница 554: ...ontrast Program PRG 15 02 60 Advanced Mode1 1 With a Multiline Terminal in an idle condition the display shows 1 17 TUE 10 52AM 201 Menu Dir VM xx CL xx This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 2 Press Enter Cursor key to enter Navigation mode The display shows 100 Operation List 1 6 Call History xx Contacts This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals xx List Number ...

Страница 555: ...ursor key to select Contrast 521 Display 1 5 Contrast Minimum Brightness This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 7 Press Enter Cursor key to show the LCD Contrast Adjustment mode Contrast 1 x Down Up Contrast 5 This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 8 Press Left Right Cursor key to adjust the contrast level 9 Press Enter Cursor key to save the change that been ...

Страница 556: ...al Answer to pick up the call Only ring groups calls can be used with Universal Night Answer For more on setting up Universal Answer refer to Central Office Calls Answering on page 1 138 You may also be able to use Transfer to UNA An extension user can transfer their call to UNA i e External Paging at night Once transferred the call rings the External Paging speakers like any other UNA call and ca...

Страница 557: ...System Numbering Pulse to Tone conversion SMDR Volume Control Call Arrival CAR keys and Virtual Extension keys do not support Day Night Mode 09 Programmable Function keys Universal Night Answer will only work when call is sent to a ring group There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night Service mode modes 1 8 Also Universal Answer allows an extension user to pick...

Страница 558: ... 2 Night Mode Group 2 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 default 1 12 06 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Assign the trunks into one of the four Night Mode Service Groups 1 Night Mode Group 1 2 Night Mode Group 2 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 default 1 12 07 01 Text Data for Night Mode Assign the data that will be displayed on the phones display when the system enters o...

Страница 559: ...01 Night Mode Service Enabled Per class of service PRG 20 06 01 allow or deny the ability for an extension to manually switch between the day night modes 0 OFF User cannot control manual night mode 1 ON User can control manual night mode default class 15 1 default class 1 14 0 Automatic Night Mode Program Number Program Name Description Assigned Data 12 01 02 Automatic Night Mode Switching This pr...

Страница 560: ...he Night Mode Key PRG 15 07 key 09 0 Toggle Will follow PRG 12 08 01 1 Skip When pressed the system will step to the next night mode time period in PRG 12 02 default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys This program is used on a per station basis to assign different function keys to the Multiline Terminals Function key 09 is the Night Mode Service key This key when pro grammed on a phone requires...

Страница 561: ...Mode code number below 1 Day 1 Mode 2 Night 1 Mode 3 Midnight 1 Mode 4 Rest 1 Mode 5 Day 2 Mode 6 Night 2 Mode 7 Midnight 2 Mode 8 Rest 2 Mode To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones 1 Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code assigned in PRG 11 15 09 You hear a confirmation tone 2 Hang up The call rings over the External Paging enabling anyone...

Страница 562: ...de 2 Night Mode 3 M Night Mode 4 Rest PRG 20 07 01 1 On 1 Current time is 17 30 and mode is Mode 4 Rest 2 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or Off Hook 3 Dial 787 mode skip to Mode 2 Night 4 Press Speaker key or On Hook OR 1 Current time is 17 30 and mode is Mode 4 Rest 2 Press LK07 mode skip to Mode 2 Night SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 550 Night Service N ...

Страница 563: ...tion The second line appearance stays idle The caller hears ringback tone while their call waits This is set in the called extension Class of Service DID Call Waiting An extension can optionally have DID calls camp on with Off Hook Call Wait signaling without Off Hook Call Wait signaling or no signaling This is set in the called extension Class of Service Block Manual Off Hook Signals This Class o...

Страница 564: ...ttings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline and Single Line Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Callback Call Waiting Camp On Direct Inward Dialing DID Handsfree and Monitor Hotline Intercom One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Reverse Voice Over Single Line Terminals Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 11 12 03 Service Code Setu...

Страница 565: ...conds 80 01 01 39 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 39 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number Refer to Programming Manual Operation To send Off Hook signals to an extension busy on a call Your extension may send off hook signals automatically 1 Dial service code OR Press the Off Hook Signaling key PRG 15 07 or SC751 33 You hear ringback To have your call voice anno...

Страница 566: ...sh may be helpful to access features of the connected Telco PBX or Centrex Conditions One Touch keys provide a Busy Lamp Field BLF When a Multiline Terminal user is on a call they can transfer to another station by pressing a DSS key for that station It is not necessary to press Transfer key to transfer to another station using a DSS key When a Multiline Terminal user is on a call they must press ...

Страница 567: ...Programmable Function Key Programming General Level COS 01 15 1 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS con soles DSS One Touch key 101 160 The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS con soles No Setting Operation Programmable Function Keys To define a Programmable Function Key as a One Touch Key 1 Dial the service code for Function Key Programming PRG 11 11 17 751 by default 2 Pr...

Страница 568: ... Group a Dial 2 to store a Speed Dial System dialing number OR Dial 4 to store a Speed Dial Group dialing number b Dial Speed Dial number storage code e g 001 c Press Hold key d Press Speaker key For Central Office Calls Placing Trunk Calling a Dial the general trunk access code 9 OR Dial the specific Trunk Service Code 9 plus the trunk number e g 005 OR Dial the Trunk Group Service Code 704 plus ...

Страница 569: ...operator group A call to an operator that is busy rolls to the next operator in the operator group Default Settings No operators are assigned System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Attendant Call Queuing Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 01 01 System Options Operator Access Mode 0 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator...

Страница 570: ...Program Num ber Program Name Default 20 38 01 Operator Group Setting 0 Operation Refer to the individual features for operation SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 558 Operator O ...

Страница 571: ...zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group the announcement is made on the external zones only Relay Control Relays can be used for External MOH BGM resource External Speaker or Door Box control in accordance with PRG 10 61 01 and PRG 10 61 02 settings In PRG 10 61 01 assign the Relay to the device to be paired with 0 No setting 1 External MOH 2 BGM 3 External Speaker 4 Door Box In ca...

Страница 572: ...ass of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Class 1 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Paging Display COS 01 15 1 31 01 02 System Options for Internal External Paging Page An nouncement Duration 1200 seconds 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Refer to Programming Manual 31 04 01 External Paging Zone Group Ext...

Страница 573: ...lift the handset 2 Dial 703 and the External Paging Zone code 1 3 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 3 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page may be announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 4 Dial 703 and the ...

Страница 574: ...d VRS number is dialed or there is no recorded VRS greeting the caller hears an error tone Paging External VRS will not play the starting and ending tone if enabled If the starting and ending tones are needed they must be recorded in the VRS message itself After the recorded VRS message is finished the paging telephone hears a busy tone When using the speaker mode on a paging telephone the telepho...

Страница 575: ... code 1 8 0 for all call 3 Dial VRS message Number 001 100 4 Make announcement 5 Press Speaker key at Multiline Terminal or on hook OR 1 Press the DSS One Touch key programmed for External Paging To Program One Touch Key The following example shows how to program a One Touch key for External Paging zone 2 to play VRS greeting number 099 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 8 5 1 3 Press the Function key to ...

Страница 576: ...n assign up to 16 IP extensions to an Internal or All Call Paging Group A system must have at least one extension port idle to make an Internal Page If no extension port is idle the extension performing the Page hears a busy signal There are 32 available Internal Paging Groups Zones A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from showing incoming int...

Страница 577: ...ass of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Class 1 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Paging Display COS 01 15 1 31 01 01 System Options for Internal External Paging All Call Paging Zone Name Group all 31 01 02 System Options for Internal External Paging Page An nouncement Duration 1200 seconds 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Int...

Страница 578: ...bined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page is announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 32 Dialin...

Страница 579: ... and Service Code Available for Personal Park The Personal Park feature is enhanced by using a Programmable Function Key or service code 3 digit or 1 digit to place a call in Personal Park This option is available for Multiline Terminals and single line sets and can be used for analog or ISDN trunks Conditions An extension user can park a call in any Park Orbit However an extension user can pick u...

Страница 580: ... virtual extension is programmed on not the virtual extension key Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Caller ID Direct Station Selection DSS Console Hold Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 11 12 31 Service Code Setup for Service Access Park Hold...

Страница 581: ...er Park Call COS 01 15 1 20 11 26 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Station Park Hold Mode COS 01 15 0 20 11 27 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Park Automatically Search COS 01 15 1 24 01 02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Callback Time 30 seconds 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Normal 90 seconds 24 01 07 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time E...

Страница 582: ... to cycle between Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up To pick up a parked call 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the Park key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 04 orbit OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 6 and the Park orbit 01 64 To Park a call at your extension 1 Do not hang up 2 Press the Personal Pa...

Страница 583: ... skip pressing Speaker key The Personal Park single digit service code PRG 11 16 11 cannot be used in this operation If it recalls the extension pressing the Personal Park key or flashing Speaker key answers the call To answer a call parked at a co worker s extension 1 Press Speaker key dial plus the co worker s extension number At a Single Line Terminal skip pressing Speaker key To display Caller...

Страница 584: ... up If not picked up the call will recall to you OR 1 Press Hold or Transfer key 2 Press the DSS BLF key programmed as 6 The Park location will be displayed in the LCD 3 Press Speaker key to hang up SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 572 Park P ...

Страница 585: ...l Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed This gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits Conditions When using Account Codes do not use in a PBX access code Otherwise after the the trunk stops sending digits to the central office The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in a Speed Dialing bin If Speed Dialing routes a call to a PBX trunk it does not automatical...

Страница 586: ...ulse to Tone Conversion Ring Groups Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 14 01 01 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk Name Trunk port Number 001 084 Trunk Name 001 084 14 01 02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Level 32 0dB 14 01 08 Basic Trunk Data Setup Toll Restriction 1 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signalin...

Страница 587: ...the Multiline Terminal only press the PBX trunk group key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 02 group 2 Dial PBX access code and number OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key and dial 0 OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset and dial 9 2 Dial the PBX access code and number OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 9 3 Dial the PBX t...

Страница 588: ...ure 1 31 PC Programming Overview on page 1 576 three connection types are available to PCPro WebPro PCPro user can connect directly or remotely using a modem LAN A connection with the system is made via the Connection Dialog in the application Refer to Figure 1 32 PCPro Connection Dialog on page 1 577 Modem remote connections are established via the internal VMDB modem To access the modem dial a t...

Страница 589: ...assword 3 Optional Load a defined Connection Account can skip steps 1 3 by using this option 4 To make the connection to the system click Connect If using WebPro a user can connect only via IP To connect launch a web browser i e IE or Mozilla and enter the IP address of the system default 192 168 0 10 SL1100 also supports a NetBIOS so that user can access by http SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features a...

Страница 590: ...edit system programming from a Web browser System Data License Information and Modification History are among the items that can be viewed in WebPro refer to Figure 1 33 WebPro Home Page on page 1 578 Figure 1 33 WebPro Home Page SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 578 PC Programming P ...

Страница 591: ...ogramming input the system IP default 192 168 0 10 or NetBIOS Address default http SL1100 like you would logging into WebPro Use the extension number as User Name and Password is assigned in PRG 90 28 01 default 1111 Figure 1 34 WebPro End User Screen Conditions When connecting via a dial up connection a Dial Up Connection PPP must be configured in Windows Network Connections When uploading via a ...

Страница 592: ...nto WebPro same time You can have up to two phones in programming mode same time You can have total of four users in programming mode at same time This can be a any mix of Telephone programming user and Webpro user as long as it wont exceed four users Only One user can be logged into PC PRO While user is logged into PC PRO Webpro Telephone programming couldn t be used When programming via WebPro P...

Страница 593: ...s 740 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment not assigned 90 02 01 Programming Password Setup User Name Refer to Programming Manual 90 02 02 Programming Password Setup Password Refer to Programming Manual 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level Refer to Programming Manual 90 26 01 Program Access Level Setup Maintenance Level Refer to Programming Manual 90 28 01 User Pr...

Страница 594: ...Pro supports only IP Accounts Y Y WebPro Refer to PRG 90 02 in the Pro gramming Manual Programming Screen Help Text System Data Help Text Y Y Help in WebPro is more simplified than in PCPro Control Hint Text Y Y Smart Links Y Smart Labels Y Y Smart Controls Y Validation Y Y Multi Assign ments Extension Num bers Y PCPro provides special screens that allow multiple values to be set easily This ap pl...

Страница 595: ...p Help Pages Y Y WebPro has more simplified help than PCPro Security Application Login Y Y User name password protection to login to PCPro WebPro KTS Connection Login Y PCPro connections to a System are user name password protected File Open Y You can password protect a PCPro saved database Debug Capture CPU Unit Debug Capture Y PCPro provides a tool for capturing debug information from the CPU Un...

Страница 596: ...ng GUI or image files resembled to real Hardware By using this Intuition Setup GUI user who is not familiar with the system will be able to intuitively understand the system settings Start Intuition Setup Intuition setup can be entered by clicking Intuition QA icon at Navigation Bar Intuition Setup Tab SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 584 PC Programming Intuition Setup P ...

Страница 597: ...ware and Service Hardware has like a Intuition QA Service has like a InMail 3 Main Work Area This is used for Data assignment Various configurations can be set using Drag Drop of packages or terminals from Slide Panel Area 4 Slide Panel Area This area indicates overview of current trunk or terminal assignment and parts list of packages and terminals Navigation Bar Navigation Bar is shown at left s...

Страница 598: ...ages and terminals are shown in below table To remove packages or terminals select None from Slide Panel and Drag Drop to required slot or port like a PCPro Card Configuration Table 1 55 Package List for Drag Drop Package type Description Note 084M Dedicated to slot 1 4 and 7 084M 4COI Dedicated to slot 1 4 and 7 4COIDB can be set on 084M 080E 008E and 000E V1 5 Added 080E 080E can be set to slot ...

Страница 599: ...ption MLT MLT can be set to Multiline Terminal port of 080E and 084M SLT SLT can be set to Single Line Terminal port of 008E and 084M Doorphone DoorPhone can be set to Single Line Terminal port No 3 and 4 of 084M Maximum 6 Doorphones can be set in a system DSS DSS can be set to any Multiline Terminal port of 080E and 084M Maximum 12 DSS consoles can be set in a system Intuition Setup Page 1 Trunk ...

Страница 600: ...ble SIP line 0 32 PRG 10 03 VOIP VOIPDB package installation PRG 10 40 IP Trunk Availability 01 Set to 1 Enable 02 Set to Setting Line Count VOIPDB package is installed per 4 ports base If 13 ports are required it needs to set 16 When you click Next and If you receive the following message you exceeded the Trunk Lines that is available for the system Below is the example where number exceed the Tr...

Страница 601: ... Terminal Type No Setting SLT handsets 0 60 PRG 10 03 01 SLI Logical Port Changed to Logical Port Number PRG 10 03 05 SLI Select Port Type Changed to SLT SLT is installed per 4 or 8 ports base DSS Console 0 12 PRG 10 03 01 ESI Terminal Type Changed to DSS PRG 10 03 02 ESI Logical Port Changed to Logical Port Number NEC Doorphones 6 PRG 10 03 01 SLI Logical Port Changed to Logical Port Number PRG 1...

Страница 602: ... set 1 Port 69 76 are assigned as InMail automatically PRG 15 03 03 Terminal type Changed to 1 Special PRG 16 02 01 Department Group Changed to 32 PRG 45 01 01 Voice Mail Department Group Changed to 32 Music on hold Port 0 Not Assigned 1 Chassis 1 Slot 1 2 Chassis 2 Slot 1 3 Chassis 3 Slot 1 PRG 10 60 01 Audio Port No 2 External MOH Select the KSU to use as external MOH input Background music PRG ...

Страница 603: ... 1 KSU Selection 3a Slot Package Figure 1 40 Intuition Setup Page 4 KSU View 1 KSU Selection At Main Work Area only one KSU configuration can be indicated on the screen In order to see other KSU configuration please select the KSU Image to see other KSU configuration 2 Ex Trk Free Port List This list indicates free port number of extension and trunk This number is increased or decreased when confi...

Страница 604: ...atically Unused Ext Trunk In MLT if PRG 10 03 ESI 01 Terminal Type is set to No Setting in KSU View all the extension port are showed in Gray Color In Analog line if PRG 90 06 Trunk Control is set to 0 Set Busy Out in KSU View all trunk lines are showed in Gray Color Data Setting By clicking H W figure in a KSU View the screen jumps to Data Setting for each H W and related Programs to be assigned ...

Страница 605: ... and Name PRG 10 12 01 IP Address PRG 10 12 02 Subnet Mask PRG 10 12 03 Default Gateway MOH Indicate Icon and Name PRG 10 04 01 MOH Source Selection PRG 10 04 02 MOH Tone Selection BGM Indicate Icon and Name PRG 10 61 01 Relay Type PRG 10 61 02 Destination Selection PRG 15 07 01 Function Key settings Paging Indicate Icon and Name PRG 31 04 01 External Paging Zone Group selection PRG 31 10 01 Exter...

Страница 606: ...Settings on page 1 594 This Data Setting can be also entered from Navigation Bar Analog Trunks icon Click IRG icon Figure 1 42 Analog Trunk Settings Then Incoming Ring Extension dialog is indicated When Incoming Ring Extension dialog is opened the check box indicates current IRG member as On SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 594 PC Programming Intuition Setup P ...

Страница 607: ...1 02 or PRG 11 04 is indicated When VMI is assigned at PRG 22 05 InMail is indicated 4 Check box When check box is set to On that terminal is assigned to the IRG at PRG 22 04 When set to Off that terminal is removed from the IRG at PRG 22 04 1 When Incoming Ring Extension dialog is opened the check box indicates current IRG member as On 2 InMail check box can not be Off when VMI IRG 102 is assigne...

Страница 608: ...aximum number of one IRG member is 32 extensions To add new member delete Off some member at check box first 2 Maximum number of IRG is 25 If more than 25 member pattern is required some IRG group needs to be deleted at normal program mode 3 After changing IRG member if same contents group is already exist new IRG is not generated 4 When all members are deleted from IRG PRG 22 05 01 is set 0 No se...

Страница 609: ...ing or Background Music and click KEY icon see below Figure 1 45 External Paging Settings on page 1 597 and Figure 1 46 Back Ground Music Settings on page 1 598 This Data Setting can be also entered from Navigation Bar External Paging or Background Music icon Figure 1 45 External Paging Settings ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 597 P ...

Страница 610: ... is opened each Function key indicates current assigned function 3 Function Key Number 4 Function Key button 5 Function Key information 1 Extension Port information 2 OK CANCEL button 1 Extension Port information MLT port number is indicated in list box SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 598 PC Programming Intuition Setup P ...

Страница 611: ...Key is assigned When entered from External Paging Settings External Paging Key is indicated same for Background Music Key 5 Function Key information Current assigned function is indicated For example set the Function Key from KSU View Case Assign External Paging Key to Function Key No 1 of MLT 101 Port 1 1 Select MLT 101 and click the Function Key 1 Click Function Key 1 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features a...

Страница 612: ... Function Key setting Group or internal paging can not be set HW Setting Operation Once after PCPro DB Data Base is modified from Default DB Navigation Bar shows HW Setting Link instead of Intuition QA link Intuition QA Page1 3 is only available when the PCPro DB is default state When open the saved data base file pcp Navigation Bar shows HW setting Link instead of Intuition QA link When PCPro is ...

Страница 613: ... is only can be done using PCPro If the Function has 12 lines rest of Function Key will be gray and can not be changed Default Settings None System Availability Terminals None Required Component s PC Programming Related Features PC programming Guide to Feature Programming Refer to PC Programming on page 1 576 Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 601 P ...

Страница 614: ...er failure are fixed one to one System features cannot be activated from Single Line Terminal when Power Failure Transfer is in operation When power is restored to the system the call in progress on Power Failure Transfer is maintained Refer to the SL1100 System Hardware Manual for the PFT Connections Power Failure phone need to be connected to Power Failure PF port on COIDB unit A total of 9 Powe...

Страница 615: ...coming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians When a customer calls in the dispatcher lifts the handset to get their call Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize a...

Страница 616: ...ing Line Pref erence for Trunk Calls 1 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 20 08 21 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Auto matic Trunk Seizing by Pressing Speaker Key COS 01 15 0 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 1 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priori ty 1 22 04 01 Incoming Exte...

Страница 617: ...n your Prime Line 1 Lift the handset Depending on your Line Preference programming you either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 605 P ...

Страница 618: ... programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming Direct Inward Line DIL calls ring an idle Department Group member then follow PRG 22 08 then PRG 22 05 An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line A Private Line can also be a Prime Line You should always program a line k...

Страница 619: ...ions 1 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment 1 22 07 01 DIL Assignment not assigned Operation To place a call on your Private Line 1 Press the Private Line key and then press ...

Страница 620: ...ey or press Speaker key or lift handset To place a call on your Private line from a Single Line Terminal 1 Pick up handset Private Line dial tone is heard 2 Dial the number To answer a call on you Private Line from a Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 608 Private Line P ...

Страница 621: ...features Programming a 60 button console requires separate programming Below shows example of function key and LCD display indication PRG 15 07 01 Function Key Assignment FunctionNu mber Function Display 00 None All Blank 01 DSS One Touch DSS ONE TOUCH 02 Microphone Key ON OFF MIC KEY 03 DND Key DND KEY 04 BGM ON OFF BGM 05 Headset HEADSET 07 Conference Key CONFERENCE 10 Call Forward Immediate CAL...

Страница 622: ...In order for a station to retrieve a held ICM call the station must have an ICM key assigned in 15 07 00 Default Settings The first 12 keys on a telephone are Line keys e g key 01 line 001 The remaining keys are unassigned System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Direct Station Selection DSS Console One Touch Ca...

Страница 623: ... 2 Dial 752 for 3 digit codes 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Enter the 3 digit key function and any additional information needed for the key For available functions codes refer to PRG 15 07 in the SL1100 Programing Manual To undefine a key enter 000 When a key is programmed using service code 752 that key cannot be programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined 00...

Страница 624: ...f six users in programming mode simultaneously However the two phone programming users do not show up in session management in WebPro PCPro can be logged in with only one user This is allowed only if no other users are logged into programming mode PCPro WebPro or Phone Also if a user is connected to the switch via PCPro no other user can log in through PCPro WebPro or Phone Programming Programming...

Страница 625: ...rogramming Manual 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Level 1 Please refer to Programming Manual Operation Refer to the SL1100 Programming Manual for additional information ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 613 P ...

Страница 626: ...nually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion OR Wait 10 seconds Dial the OCC security code and desired number The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is valid only for Dial Pulse trunks PRG 14 02 01 options 0 or 1 Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s COIDB B1 Related Features Central Of...

Страница 627: ...etup DP to DTMF Conversion Options 2 Operation To convert your telephone dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line 1 Place a call over pulse line 2 Dial to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 615 P ...

Страница 628: ... 02 60 0 Redial feature work by pressing the Left Cursor key then dial SYS menu is displayed on LCD When set PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 pressing the Left Cursor key enter Received call log or pressing the Right Cursor key enter Dialed Number log for Redial function Refer Navigation key feature section Stored name for Redial Function is cleared when the system is reset Default Settings Enabled System Avai...

Страница 629: ...OR 1 Press the List softkey 2 Press the Redial softkey 3 Press the Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to view the number to dial 4 Dial press Speaker key or lift the handset To access a System Speed Dial bin For SL1100 Telephones Only 1 Press the Left Cursor key REDIAL ABB is displayed along with the last dialed number 2 Dial the System Speed Dial bin number The number stored in that bin is displaye...

Страница 630: ...ursor key 2 Press the Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to view the number to dial 3 When the desired number is displayed Press Right Cursor key Speaker key or Lift handset To access a Speed Dial by Directory Dialing For SL1100 Terminals Only 1 On Hook condition 2 Press Down Cursor key and press 1st character you want to search 3 Press Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to select the destination name...

Страница 631: ...ete When the time turns to 12 00 AM the telephone system resets and switches to the new firmware regardless of extension or trunk busy status File extension pkg have to use MEMDB installed system and can not upload to Non MEMDB system File extension nomem have to use Non MEMDB system and can not upload to MEMDB system Individual software or firmware can not use for Remote Upload The Package file n...

Страница 632: ...o Feature Programming Refer to PC Programming on page 1 576 Operation PCPro 1 Obtain the firmware package file from NEC 2 Open and login to PCPro 3 Connect to the system 4 Under the Home Menu Maintenance Zone choose the Upgrade SW option 5 In the Firmware Update Type Window Select the Firmware Update From PCPro and Click OK 6 In the firmware update window browse to the location of the Firmware Pac...

Страница 633: ...9 Once finished system will reset itself When System reset PCPro will automatically disconnect ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 621 R ...

Страница 634: ...for outgoing calls can affect how a Repeat Redial call is placed Refer to Central Office Calls Placing options as needed For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call Single Line Terminals cannot use Repeat Redial If a user activates repeat dial while they are on an active call the repeat dial process will begin once they end the current call Defau...

Страница 635: ... Setup Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk 0 seconds Operation To use Repeat Redial if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy 1 Place a trunk call Listen for busy tone or ring no answer 2 Press the Repeat Redial key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 29 The Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to redial 3 Press Speaker key to hang up The system periodically redials the call 4 Lif...

Страница 636: ...xtension assignments for Attendant Add On Consoles are not assigned Default Attendant Add On Console key assignments are DSS Keys 001 060 Stations 101 160 First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default Press and hold the S1 LOAD button and press the Power switch Continue to hold the S1 switch for approximately 5 10 seconds before releasing The system boots loading Res...

Страница 637: ... the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associated extension like a Hotline key An extension user cannot however use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls by one touch operation Conditions An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension limited only by the number of available function keys When the destination extension is in Do Not Disturb a Rev...

Страница 638: ...eys Refer to Programming Manual 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Ex tension are Class 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Au tomatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override COS 01 15 1 Operation When on a call To place a Reverse Voice Over call 1 Press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 47 dest ext Your Reverse V...

Страница 639: ...you to communicate with the initial reverse voice over caller To return to your initial caller 1 Release the Reverse Voice Over key If the co worker you call hangs up you return to the initial call automatically When the telephone is idle To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination 1 Press your Reverse Voice Over key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 47 destination extension You can optionally lift t...

Страница 640: ... the line key If the extension does not have a line key the trunk rings the line appearance key If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group the trunk follows Access Map programming Conditions DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until DIL overflow Default Settings All trunks are in Ring Group 1 Extensions 101 108 ring for trunk calls and all other extensions only fla...

Страница 641: ...service code specified in PRG 11 15 09 0 Normal 1 VRS 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie Line 6 Delay VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 11 15 09 Transfer to Incoming Ring Group This program is used to assign a service code to transfer a call to a ring group When a call is transferred to a ring group it follows the trunks ring group setting in PRG 22 05 01 For example the station is in Ri...

Страница 642: ...M pilot assigned in PRG 45 01 01 default 1 22 11 01 Received Number Enter the digits received from the Telco that are going to be transla ted The amount of digits entered should be equal to the setting assigned in PRG 22 09 01 Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default Not Assigned 22 11 02 Target Number To route a DID to a ring group the target number should be left unas signed A call can ring a target numb...

Страница 643: ...nk Ring Group Assignment Ring Group 1 2 3 Ext 301 1 0 1 0 1 Ext 302 0 1 1 0 1 Ext 303 0 1 0 1 1 1 To allow extension user to answer flashing line be sure to give extension incoming access to the trunk in PRG 14 07 and PRG 15 06 1 Extension rings 0 Extension does not ring Operation Refer to Central Office Calls Answering on page 1 138 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 631 R ...

Страница 644: ...Dial System Group Station numbers and follow their trunk routing as the destination number Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding For example the ringdown destination can forward their calls When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset ringdown automatically calls the extension to which calls are forwarded If the Ringdown Extension user hears busy tone when they lift the handset they can...

Страница 645: ...ce for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Ex tension are Class 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Inter com Calls COS 01 15 1 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hot line Extension Ringdown COS 01 15 1 20 08 19 Class of Service Option Outgoing Call Service Hotline for Speaker COS 01 15 0 21 01 09 System Options for Outgoing Calls Ringdown Exte...

Страница 646: ...before your ringdown goes through If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled your call voice announces If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled your call rings To answer a call if you are another extension ringdown destination 1 Speak toward telephone to answer incoming voice announcement OR Lift the handset or press Speaker key to answer ringing Intercom call SL1100 ISSUE 2...

Страница 647: ...l During Room monitoring by pressing Talk softkey at monitoring terminal both way talk is available Adding both way talk monitored terminal can make conference call by Talk softkey if multiple terminals are monitoring To provide this feature following PRG need to be set On PRG 20 13 55 Intercom call to room monitor COS of Room Monitored PRG 20 13 11 Room Monitoring PRG 20 13 12 Room Monitored Setu...

Страница 648: ... Availability Terminals Multiline Terminals and Single Line Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Hotel Motel Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 14 17 Service Code Setup for Hotel Hotel Room Monitor 675 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is...

Страница 649: ...user have the ability to be monitored by another extension In PRG 20 13 12 enter 1 In PRG 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions In PRG 15 07 01 assign a Room Monitor key code 39 to both the monitoring and monitored extension Stop Yes No Yes No Figure 1 47 Multiline Room Monitoring ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 637 R ...

Страница 650: ...ation You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor You can only listen to one extension at a time Multiline Terminals To activate Room Monitor from an idle Multiline Terminal initiating extension 1 Press the Room Monitor key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 39 2 Dial the number of extension you want to monitor You can place and answer other cal...

Страница 651: ... be monitored 1 Lift the handset at the telephone to be monitored 2 Dial 675 3 Dial 1 4 Dial number of the extension number which is monitoring the telephone 5 Place the handset on the desk placing the handset transmitter towards the room You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active To cancel Room Monitor at either extension 1 Hang up the handsets for both the monitored and ...

Страница 652: ...tiating extension case PRG 20 13 11 1 On to Ext101 and Ext102 PRG 20 13 55 1 On to Ext100 Ext100 is set as Room Monitored extension 1 At Ext101 and Ext102 make ICM call to Ext100 2 Room Monitor started automatically 3 Press the Talk softkey at Ext100 and start Conf call with Ext101 and Ext102 4 At Ext102 On hook backs to Monitoring state and Ext100 and Ext101 remain ICM talk 5 At either On Hook bo...

Страница 653: ...bers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered unanswered or busy The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired Conditions For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects Function keys simplify Save Number Dialed operation Default Settin...

Страница 654: ...l 1 Press the Save Number Dialed key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 30 Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 715 To redial a saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press an idle trunk line key This selects a specific trunk for the call 2 Press the Save Number Dialed key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 30 The stored number dials out OR 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 715 OR Press the Save Number Dialed key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 30...

Страница 655: ...ys for 10 seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an idle line key Press Speaker key 2 Press Exit key To clear your saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 785 3 Press Speaker key to hang up Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset and dial 785 2 Hang up ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 643 S ...

Страница 656: ... assigned Up to 32 calls can be queued waiting on an SIE key When a Secondary Incoming Extension call is received and answered while the user is on an outside line the first call can be automatically put on hold If a trunk call rings a Secondary Incoming Extension to answer the call the station must be programmed with the direct trunk appearance key and the SIE must be programmed to allow the call...

Страница 657: ... 18 01 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Virtual Exten sion Key Operation Mode 0 15 18 02 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Display mode when placing a call on Virtual Extension Key 1 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions CAR SIE Virtual Extension Delay Interval 10 seconds 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Ex tension are Class 1 20 07 1...

Страница 658: ...he key 6 Press Hold key once for Immediate Ring or skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 8 Press Hold key again for Delayed Ring or skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delays ringing 10 Press Speaker key SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 646 Secondary Incoming Extension S ...

Страница 659: ...use this feature for example to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it is most convenient An extension can have a Secretary Call key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call is not available to Single Line Terminal users Secretary Call does not se...

Страница 660: ...fast The telephone continues to ring until the Secretary Call key is pressed To check to see who left you a Secretary Call 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press Help key 3 Press the Secretary Call key that flashed 4 Press Exit key To answer your Secretary Call indication 1 Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension 1 Press the lit S...

Страница 661: ...Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls An extension can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to Single Line Terminal users An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroute a co worker s calls to themselves A Multiline Terminal can have a S...

Страница 662: ...etary Call Pickup key lights and the boss s telephone display shows BOSS FWD Calls intended for covered extension ring your telephone instead To cancel Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss extension To check a key Secretary Call Pickup assignment 1 Press Help key 2 Press your Secretary Call Pickup key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss s extension 3...

Страница 663: ...sors can be connected PRG 82 21 needs to set up according to used sensor Security sensor can start and stop automatically according to PRG 20 48 01 setting Security sensor can start and stop manually using Service code PRG 11 12 64 or function key 33 assigned after the timer PRG 20 55 01 time outs V1 5 or higher When the system receives a sensor detection signal from a Security sensor either items...

Страница 664: ...sion is set in PRG 13 04 03 04 These programs can be set by pressing Transfer key in the Speed Dial name setting indication for the outside caller 1 Press Transfer key 2 Select TRF Mode 3 Remote Monitor 3 Enter monitored extension number and press Hold key Room monitor functions when the set extension is in an idle state otherwise a busy tone ISDN trunk or ringback tone Analogue trunk is sent to o...

Страница 665: ...s not follow ARS settings If PRG 13 01 01 is set to Trunk the system uses command PRG 13 05 to route the emergency call If PRG 13 01 01 is set to ICM the system uses command PRG 14 06 to route the emergency call The VRS allows you to record up to 100 VRS messages 001 100 when using the compact flash card If you are using the built in VRS without the compact flash then you can only record message 1...

Страница 666: ...on Number No setting 15 07 Room Monitoring Programmable Function Key Refer to Programming Manual 20 21 05 Room Monitoring Long conversation cut off when Room Monitoring 180 11 10 49 Remote Inspection Auto Dial Setting for Remote Inspection 619 20 45 01 Remote Inspection Ring Terminal for Remote Inspection No setting 20 45 02 Remote Inspection Ring Time Setting 0000 20 45 03 Remote Inspection Ring ...

Страница 667: ...to Programming Manual 20 44 01 Watch mode Internal Paging Group for Watch Mes sage 0 20 44 02 Watch mode External Paging Group for Watch Mes sage 0 20 44 03 Watch mode VRS Message for Watch Mode 0 20 44 04 Watch mode Interval Timer for Watch Message 0 20 46 01 Watch mode Sensor Mode 0 20 46 02 Watch mode Internal Paging Group for Warning Mes sage 0 20 46 03 Watch mode External Paging Group for War...

Страница 668: ...1 10 46 614 Watch message setting PRG 11 12 63 717 1 0 Watch Mode Start Stop PRG 15 07 01 Set 32 to Function key PRG 20 44 01 1 Internal paging group 1 PRG 20 44 02 1 External paging group 1 PRG 20 44 03 1 VRS message number for watching 1 PRG 20 44 04 5 Interval time of Watching message 5 minutes PRG 20 47 01 1 Watch mode time pattern 1 To record Watching message to VRS 001 1 Press Speaker key di...

Страница 669: ...urity Sensor Mode Start Stop PRG 15 07 01 Set 33 to Function key PRG 20 46 01 1 Sensor mode on PRG 20 46 02 1 Internal paging group 1 PRG 20 46 03 1 External paging group 1 PRG 20 46 04 1 VRS message number for warning 1 PRG 20 46 05 999 Speed dial bin number 999 PRG 20 46 06 2 VRS message number for destination answer 2 PRG 20 46 07 30 Auto Dial Wait Timer 30 sec PRG 20 46 08 3 Times of auto repe...

Страница 670: ...y dial 719 0 at terminal OR 2 Press the red lit Function key 33 at Multiline Terminal and the Function key turn off OR 3 Security Sensor time pattern 1 comes time to stop When detect Security Sensor On 1 Warning message send to internal page group1 and external page group 1 2 Place outgoing call automatically according to speed dial bin 999 3 When destination answered send VRS message 2 4 After fi...

Страница 671: ... PRG 20 45 02 12 00 Ringing start time 12 o clock noon PRG 20 45 03 3 ringing continue time 3 minutes PRG 20 45 04 999 Speed dial bin number 999 PRG 20 45 05 1 VRS message number when inspected extension answered 1 PRG 20 45 06 2 VRS message number when emergency call destination answered 2 PRG 20 45 07 3 Times of auto repeat dial 3 PRG 20 45 08 30 Auto dial calling time 30 sec PRG 20 45 09 30 Int...

Страница 672: ...sage the call is disconnected When Not answered the Remote Inspection ring 1 At 12 00 o clock start ringing at extension 200 2 Continue ringing over 3 minutes 3 Stop ringing at extension 200 and place outgoing call automatically according to speed dial bin 999 4 When destination answered send VRS message 2 5 After finishing VRS message 2 destination person can automatically monitor through extensi...

Страница 673: ...d date They could then tell when the user is coming back from vacation The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time All telephones are able to use Selectable Display Messaging at one time The default messages are Table 1 63 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults No Message Change to 1 IN MEETING UNTIL Time when meeting done 2 MEETING ROOM Room Na...

Страница 674: ...are Class 1 20 13 19 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Se lectable Display Messaging Text Messaging COS 01 15 1 20 16 01 Selectable Display Messages Refer to Programming Manual Table 1 64 Selectable Display Message Character Entry Chart Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F a f 3 4 Ente...

Страница 675: ... format 6 Press Speaker key to hang up Intercom calls to extensions with Selectable Display Messaging set receive a DND signal and receive the display message on their telephone display instead of ringing the extension based on the setting in PRG 20 01 02 To allow calls to ring through and have the message displayed on the calling extension display cancel DND by pressing DND key dialing 0 To cance...

Страница 676: ... Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 11 20 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones 720 11 11 21 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Check In coming Ring Tones 711 15...

Страница 677: ... 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 720 3 Dial 1 to set Intercom ring 2 to set trunk ring 4 Dial code for the desired ring pattern 1 8 5 Press Speaker key to hang up To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial 711 3 Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring 2 to listen to trunk ring 4 For Intercom Ring Dial the code for the ring pattern you want to hear 1 8 OR For Trunk Ring Dial code f...

Страница 678: ...ain Just hang up when you re done and I ll get him back Conditions The transferring extension can remain off hook to auto receive the callback or hang up and it rings back to them Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 43 or assigning Transfer key as Call Back in PRG 15 02 05 1 Serial Call is not available to Single Line Terminals Serial Call can be activated o...

Страница 679: ...extension number Co worker must lift the handset to respond to your announcement 4 Press the Serial Call key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 43 OR 5 Press Transfer key if PRG 15 02 05 is set to Call Back Serial Call 6 When MLT Display shows WAIT TRF extension can hang up When your co worker hangs up the call the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your extension ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Speci...

Страница 680: ...20 03 07 System Options for Single Line Terminals Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time Forced Dial does not reset when a digit is dialed The user must finish dialing all the digits before this timer expires entries 0 64800 seconds default 0 Conditions Dial Pulse Single Line Terminals cannot access any feature that requires the user to dial or A Single Line Terminal can initiate an Internal Zo...

Страница 681: ...ollow Me Call Forwarding DND Override Call Waiting Camp On Callback Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Conference Department Calling Department Step Calling Directed Call Pickup Do Not Disturb Door Box Flash Forced Trunk Disconnect Group Call Pickup Hold Intercom Last Number Redial Line Preference Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging Transfer Message Waiting Ni...

Страница 682: ... Polarity Reverse 0 15 03 06 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Exten sion Polarity Reverse 0 15 03 07 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Enabled On Hook When Holding SLT 1 15 03 08 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Answer On Hook when Holding SLT 1 15 03 09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Function For External Module 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup ...

Страница 683: ... 03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Min detect level Type 1 10 20dBm Type 2 15 25dBm Type 3 15 25dBm Type 4 10 20dBm Type 5 10 20dBm 80 03 04 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Max detect level 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward twist level Type 1 5 5 6dBm 80 03 06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward twist level Type 1 5 0 1dBm 80 03 07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON detect time Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30m...

Страница 684: ...uirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly Conditions E 164 Enhancement is applied for the SIP trunk interface Outgoing call from caller history of incoming calls is only possible from multiline terminals SL Net systems deployed in multiple countries using this fe...

Страница 685: ... 164 Incoming Mode When this data is set to 1 then for any inbound SIP calls that include a and a country code not defined in PRG 10 02 01 delete the and add the International Access Code in PRG 10 02 02 If the country code is a match then delete both the and country code but do not add the International Access code When it is set to 2 then for any inbound SIP calls that include a and a country co...

Страница 686: ...played in terminal incoming caller history as Original Display 01 4902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL OR PRG 10 02 01 0 01 004902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL OR PRG 10 02 01 49 01 02131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL Delete and replace the and matched country code from an incoming SIP INVITE using E 164 numbering scheme PRG 84 14 16 PRG 84 14 13 Description Comments 2 Mode 2 1 ON With a SIP INVITE for i...

Страница 687: ...1 17 Store DEL OR PRG 10 02 01 49 01 902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL Making an outgoing call from history of incoming calls No Operation LCD 1 From an idle multiline terminal Clock Calendar 101 STA 101 List Dir ICM PRG 2 Press Soft Key List LIST MENU Redial CID 3 Press Soft Key CID 01 004902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL 5 Press SPK Line 001 00 01 004902131795770 ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Spec...

Страница 688: ...e SIP call could be presented once dialed as below Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly Below is the full list of SIP header fields used by this feature Request URI To Fr...

Страница 689: ... URI To and From header fields of the SIP mes sage When it is set to 2 then if the dialed international access code matches the value in PRG 10 02 02 this value is removed from the number dialed and the added as a prefix to the Request URI To and From header fields of the SIP Message 0 OFF 1 ON 2 International Access Mode default 0 Operation To make a call using E 164 number format 1 Pick up the h...

Страница 690: ...44 1509555123 172 16 0 10 No Setting Request URI Invite sip 0044 1202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 0044 1202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 44 1509555123 172 16 0 10 2 00 Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Asserted Identity P Asserted Identity 441509555123 17...

Страница 691: ... they were calling from their own local system Inbound calls can come into one central location and then be routed to any destination extension number in the network At the same time each site can still have their own independent trunks It is recommended that each site have at least one analog trunk to dial 911 in the case of an emergency Network BLF Indication Centralized Call Park Orbits Users c...

Страница 692: ...t requires 32 ports must purchase and install this license Network Requirements The voice quality of VoIP depends on variables such as available bandwidth network latency and quality of service initiatives QoS all of which are controlled by the network and internet service providers Because these variables are not within NEC s control the performance of the users IP based voice solution cannot be ...

Страница 693: ...et are to follow the local ARS routing all sites must use ARS routing SL Net is not supported through NAT A Trunk Access via Networking key 06 will not light up when all trunks in the Remote site trunk group are busy If a user tries to access a trunk when they are al busy the word Busy will be in the display and the user will hear Busy Tone but the key will not light up Camp On across SL Net is on...

Страница 694: ... call on hold the second call must be placed into a park orbit or transferred to another station Built in Automated Attendant and Centralized Voice Mail cannot be used in the same system Calls Intercom or Trunk routed across the SL Net network cannot be answered by the Built In Automated Attendant Caller ID Flexible Ringing does not work for incoming calls via the SL Net network For the calls to r...

Страница 695: ... the most commonly used programs required for this feature The programs are listed in the order that the installer should follow Refer to the PCPro wizards for further detailed programming Basic Setup Program Num ber Program Name Default 10 12 03 CPU Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the SL1100 s default gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 ...

Страница 696: ...he leading digit digits of the remote SL Net systems as 8 Networked System Access Example 1 The Remote SL Net system is going to use exten sions 200 299 then the digit 2 would be assigned as 8 Net worked System Access Example 2 The Remote SL Net system is going to use exten sions 1200 1299 then the digits 12 would be assigned as 8 Networked System Access 0 Not Used 1 Service Code 2 Extension Numbe...

Страница 697: ...al Codec Assignment Program Num ber Program Name Default 84 12 01 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frames 1 10 ms 2 20 ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms default 3 84 12 02 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 VAD mode 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 84 12 03 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Type 0 A law 1 μ law default 1 84 12 04 Networking CODEC Information Bas...

Страница 698: ...atic 3 Adaptive Immediately default 3 84 12 18 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup VAD Threshold 0 30 19 dB 10 dB 0 Adaptec Threshold 1 19 dB 49 dBm 20 0 dB 30 dBm 29 9 dBm 21 dBm 30 10 dBm 20 dBm default 20 84 12 28 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup Audio Ca pability Priority 0 G 711 1 G 723 2 G 729 3 G 722 default 0 84 12 31 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup DTMF Relay Mode If...

Страница 699: ... code used to make alternate calls must be set to a type 4 special trunk access code 0 Not Assigned 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access Code 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 F Route Access 9 Dial Extension Analyze Refer to Programming Manual 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Use this program to assign the trunk access code defined in PRG 11 01 01 This is the access code that users ...

Страница 700: ... 27 4 Remote System 4 from PRG 10 27 Refer to Programming Manual 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions This assigns extensions per day night mode to a route table PRG 14 06 01 This program follows the trunk access code in PRG 11 01 01 and 11 09 01 0 No setting Calls will not route 1 25 Route Table 1 25 default 1 21 15 01 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions This assigns extensions p...

Страница 701: ...d in PRG 22 07 01 Analog trunks can also be set as Normal type 0 to be routed following the ring group settings in PRG 22 05 01 0 Normal 1 VRS 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie Line 6 Delay VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment SL Net calls can be routed to a Centralized Voice Mail from any location using a setting data of 103 When 103 is as sig...

Страница 702: ...on number where the DID is sent The destination can be any valid extension number in the SL Net network Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 default not assigned 22 11 04 Transfer Operation Mode The transfer operation mode allows DID calls to have more routing options than just the target number If the transfer oper ation mode is set to No Transfer calls will only be delivered to the Target Number specified in...

Страница 703: ...When 103 is as signed calls will overflow to the pilot number defined in PRG 45 01 07 0 No setting 1 25 Ring Group 1 25 102 Voice Mail Call goes to the VM pilot assigned in PRG 45 01 01 103 Centralized Voice Mail if central ized VM is enabled this setting is used to route calls to the VM default 1 Centralized Voice Mail Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Number As...

Страница 704: ...e NEC recommends setting the Voice Mail department group as 3 Busy No Answer 0 No Hunting 1 Hunting when Busy 2 Hunting when Not Answered 3 Hunting when Busy No Answer default 0 16 02 01 1 Department Group Assignment for Extensions This program is used to assign the extensions to the depart ment group When using a department group for Voice Mail you must have licenses to cover every extension assi...

Страница 705: ...e networked extensions are defined with the Network Access Code PRG 11 01 Dial Type 8 A user can change the signaling type for the intercom call they place to either a voice announce or ringing call to an extension in a networked system Operation To place an Intercom call 1 At a Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or Lift the Handset OR At a Single Line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial the exten...

Страница 706: ...4 Dial 77 PRG 15 07 01 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Speaker key Network Busy Lamp Field BLF indication An extension user can see the status of other extensions throughout the network as if they were all in the same system The BLF keys will show the status for idle busy DND and Call Forward All This same key provides one button access to extensions and sy...

Страница 707: ...ingle Line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 1 PRG 11 12 24 3 Dial and the system ID the system ID must be dialed as two digits e g 01 4 Dial the External Zone number 0 3 Dial 0 calls All Call External Paging 5 Make the paging announcement 6 Press Speaker key of hang up the Handset to end the page Network Call Park Park places a call ICM or Trunk in a waiting state called Park Orbit so that an ext...

Страница 708: ... orbit is busy Try another orbit 3 Use Paging to announce the call 4 Press Speaker key or hang up the handset If not picked up the call will recall to you To pick up a parked call 1 At a Multiline Terminal press the Park key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 04 orbit OR 1 Press Speaker Key or Lift the handset 2 Dial 6 PRG 11 12 32 and the Park orbit 01 64 SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 696 SL Net S ...

Страница 709: ...ing main components 1 SL Desktop Application Software This application runs on a PC and provides the PC based GUI Graphical User Interface and features 2 Headset Optional The headset can be plugged into the Multiline telephone and used when making or receiving calls with the Desktop Client Desktop Client runs on a PC and communicates with the system through TCP UDP IP The Desktop Client can be run...

Страница 710: ...nd CFA are set for another station its BLF shows red BLF DSS to be monitored in the SL Desktop Suite Application must be programmed on a physical key on the phone or DSS console attached to the phone DSS BLF buttons that are programmed on buttons that do not physically exist on the phone or on a DSS console that is not physically present do not show up in the Desktop Application Once a SL Desktop ...

Страница 711: ...able Disk Space CD ROM Drive Network Adapter Sound Card Windows XP SP2 Windows Vista 32 and 64 bit Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Optional Component s Plantronics USB Headset Speakers Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 10 12 03 Default Gateway Define the default gateway to be used by the VOIPDB interface 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 IP Address Set or Verify IP for...

Страница 712: ...n the user name and password 0 15 05 28 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Addition Infor mation Setup Set Talking Party to 0 for Desktop Application Softphone 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key to terminals Refer to Programming Manual 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Set the DSS system Console mode 0 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Extension Number Set th...

Страница 713: ...Operation Refer to the SL Desktop Suite Manual ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 701 S ...

Страница 714: ... environments The display telephones also have a contrast control for the LCD display Soft Key mode DSX is set at PRG 15 02 60 Mode2 and can be entered by depressing Center key when the terminal is idle Refer Navigation key feature section Conditions If a feature is restricted by an extension Class of Service though the Softkey menu still displays the option the user cannot set the feature The fea...

Страница 715: ...ltiline Terminal 678 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection To select options 6 11 press either 6 or Help then press line keys 1 6 To select options 12 16 press either 12 or Help then press line keys 1 5 1 15 02 60 Soft Key Navigation key Mode 2 Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 703 S ...

Страница 716: ...enable 1 or disable 0 an extension user ability to use Department Step Calling Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Department Calling Department Step Calling Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 16 01 1 Digit Service Code Setup Step Call 2 16 01 03 Department Group Basic Data Setup Departme...

Страница 717: ...0 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Auto matic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override COS 01 15 1 Operation To make a Step Call 1 Place a call to a busy extension ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 705 S ...

Страница 718: ...Call Tracking Data Call Tracking can log the system internal data calls Since SMDR normally logs external trunk data calls Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity Digit Counting With Digit Counting SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls For example if the digit count is nine SMDR does not include toll calls in the home area code Digit Counting permits SM...

Страница 719: ...ls C if C answers then the call will be recorded If A then transfers the call and B And C are connected then it will also be recorded Mobile Extension Mobile Extension s proxy ports only output SMDR events on their client side The master side will not set or check the time stamps Actually this should be clear but as it may happen that the master side is an internal extension too this needed to be ...

Страница 720: ...DIALLED No CLI ACCOUNT POT 10 52 12 09 002 00 00 10 2001 2142623801 08754 PIN 10 52 12 09 001 00 00 20 2017 2142623802 NECinfrontia Corp PIN 10 53 12 09 002 2142623801 NO ANSWER If PRG 35 02 18 1 Caller ID Name Output Method is set to line feed the SMDR displays as follows CLASS TIME DATE LINE DURATION STATION DIALLED No CLI ACCOUNT POT 10 52 12 09 002 00 00 10 2001 2142623801 08754 PIN 10 52 12 0...

Страница 721: ...unk call placed using Toll Restriction Override PIN Incoming trunk calls POTP Outgoing trunk call with Personal Code POTW Outgoing trunk call by using Walking Toll Restriction ALB All lines in group are busy group number follows TIME field BRD Call blocked due to Toll Restriction BFL SMDR Buffer Full NEXT Calling Party Name for previous record PTRS Transferred call Incoming Outgoing IVIN BRI PRI i...

Страница 722: ...in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER Table 1 68 SMDR Report Format with PRG 35 02 14 Set to 1 Character Position Field Definition Header Line 1 1 60 Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e...

Страница 723: ...e 6 10 Time in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 16 DATE 17 Space 18 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER Table 1 69 SMDR Summary Report OUTGOING CALL COST SUMMARY FOR DAY OF nn nn nn TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS 0 TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS 0 NO OF OUTGOIN...

Страница 724: ...to allow Traffic reports to print SMDR requires a connection to the CPU LAN If no answer is received NO ANSWER is displayed regardless of the system programing for the Caller ID display option The setting in PRG 35 02 18 works regardless of the entry in PRG 35 02 15 or 35 02 17 When PRG 35 02 18 is set to 1 the first and second lines are sometimes separated When the buffer is full the overflowed d...

Страница 725: ...station will not be reported in the SMDR print out 1 Yes station will be reported in the SMDR print out default 1 15 01 14 SMDR Output of Made Intercom calls When set 0 it will not record the internal calls that been made 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 V2 0 Added 15 01 15 SMDR output of answered intercom calls When set 0 it will not record the internal calls that been received 0 Disable 1 Enable def...

Страница 726: ...26 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 VoIPDB Subnet Mask Assign the subnet mask for the VoIPDB card Refer to the programming manual for all the possible valid subnet mask entries default 255 255 255 0 SMDR flowcharts are located on the following pages Start Connect an Ethernet cable from the CPU to the PC to be used for SMDR In PRG 10 20 01...

Страница 727: ... to which the outgoing SMDR information should be sent For example you can use this feature to block the printing of security codes Yes Yes No No In PRG 35 01 04 enter the number of digits you want to block If you enter 8 for example SMDR Xs out the last 8 digits dialed Do you want to block i e X out any of the digits on the SMDR report To have only long distance calls print for example enter 8 In...

Страница 728: ...ode Calls All Calls If your system is behind a PBX do you want SMDR to include all calls ito the PBX or just calls using the PBX trunk access code In PRG 35 02 02 enter 1 Trunk Name In PRG 35 02 03 enter 0 Should the SMDR report display the trunk name or the date and trunk number Date and Trunk Number In PRG 35 02 03 enter 1 In PRG 35 02 14 enter 0 In PRG 35 02 14 enter 1 Enter 0 to disable the fo...

Страница 729: ...es or numbers In PRG 35 02 19 enter 1 In PRG 35 02 09 enter 0 In PRG 35 02 10 enter 0 Should the SMDR report include information when all lines in a group are busy and a user tries to access the group Should the DID table name be displayed for incoming DID calls Should the SMDR report display the Caller ID when an incoming DID number is transferred to an outgoing trunk Continued on next page Exten...

Страница 730: ...r dialed for ANI DNIS and DID trunks or both In PRG 35 02 16 enter 1 Both In PRG 35 02 16 enter 2 In PRG 35 02 17 enter 0 Should the SMDR report include the Account Code or Caller ID name Account Code In PRG 35 02 17 enter 1 Caller ID name In PRG 35 02 18 enter 0 Should the Caller ID Name appear on the same line as the call record In PRG 35 02 18 enter 1 Selecting this option inserts line feed and...

Страница 731: ...ings Enabled System Availability Terminals All display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Directory Dialing Name Storing Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 11 11 22 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Ex tension Name Programming 700 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name STA 101 184 No Setting 15 07 01 Programmable Func...

Страница 732: ...63 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults on page 1 661 Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum 5 Press Hold key 6 Press Speaker key to hang up To program any extension name 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 700 OR Press the Extension Name Change key PRG 15 07 or SC751 55 3 Enter the extension number to be named 4 Enter a name Refer to Table 1 70 Keys for Entering Names on page 1 721 The name can have up...

Страница 733: ...Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В Enter characters π Σ σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back or DND Clear the character entry one character at a time Flash Clear a...

Страница 734: ... heard If the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension whose Class of Service does not allow Extension Data Swap busy tone is heard If the destination extension entered is not a valid extension busy tone is heard The following user setting data is relocated with the extension All other user setting data is either not relocated or cleared DND Call Forwarding Memo Dial Last Number Dia...

Страница 735: ... Ring Assignment PRG 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions PRG 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys PRG 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions PRG 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions PRG 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions PRG 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions PRG 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup PRG 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Ext...

Страница 736: ...he Extension Data Swap Password not assigned at default PRG 92 05 01 4 Dial the extension to be swapped with or relocated to 5 When successfully completed confirmation tone is heard and the display shows completed 6 Press Speaker key twice to exit SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 724 Station Relocation S ...

Страница 737: ... Caller ID service ANI DNIS Compatibility provides Receive Format The Receive Format must be set as ANI DNIS in PRG 34 09 01 option 4 which is treated as a Feature Group D format Example of ANI Information KP009727517645STKP7100ST Flexible Routing Based on the data received the system can route the incoming ANI DNIS call to An extension An ACD or Voice Mail master extension number V1 5 or higher A...

Страница 738: ...ional T 1s the unit comes up with zero ports until PRG 10 03 06 is set to the 4 8 12 16 20 24 auto and then reset If the number of ports are changed for a fractional T 1 in PRG 10 03 06 the trunk ports could be reassigned if the numerical sequence would split or it could fit into an empty gap of trunk ports Examples The COIU is assigned for trunk ports 1 8 and 17 24 and the T 1 12 ports was assign...

Страница 739: ...1 Fractional Setup 0 10 51 01 PRI T1 Selection 0 PRI 14 01 02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Level 32 0dB 14 01 03 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Level 32 0dB 14 01 07 Basic Trunk Data Setup Outgoing Calls 1 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signaling Type DP DTMF 2 14 02 02 Analog Trunk Data Setup Ring Detect Type 1 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 ...

Страница 740: ...mber Conversion DID Name not assigned 22 13 01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment 1 34 01 01 E M Tie Line Basic Setup DID E M Start Signaling 1 34 01 02 E M Tie Line Basic Setup Receive Dial Type for E M Tie Line 1 34 01 03 E M Tie Line Basic Setup E M Dial In Mode 0 34 01 04 E M Tie Line Basic Setup E M Line Dial Tone 1 34 02 01 E M Tie Line Class of Service 1 34 09 01 ANI DNIS Servi...

Страница 741: ... Direct Inward Dialing DID ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 729 T ...

Страница 742: ...ed from either telephone Tandem Ringing can support up to 128 pairs of Tandem Ringing extensions The extension user which enables Tandem Ringing is the master while the slave telephone is the extension entered by the user while setting up the feature A slave telephone ignores the settings for DND and follows the master telephone settings instead Voice Call is not supported on a Multiline Terminal ...

Страница 743: ... Refer to Programming Manual 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS consoles DSS One Touch key 101 160 The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS consoles No Setting Operation To set up Tandem Ringing 1 Press Speaker key at the extension considered to be the master telephone optional 2 Dial PRG 11 11 41 OR Press the Tandem Ringing key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 80 3 Dial 1 to set the fe...

Страница 744: ... at the other extension until the busy telephone has hung up Multiline Terminals indicate TANDEM IN USE in the display and Single Line Terminal users hear a busy signal when the handset is lifted To cancel Tandem Ringing 1 Dial PRG 11 11 41 OR Press the Tandem Ringing key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 80 2 Dial 0 to cancel the feature SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 732 Tandem Ringing T ...

Страница 745: ...king from Conference An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference by dialing a 3 digit service code 8 or a uniquely programmed Transfer key Method B Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they have placed on Hold It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call Method C...

Страница 746: ...MF With an analog trunk the Continue Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from the opposite side trunk With an ISDN trunk PRG 14 01 25 must be enabled to detect the Continue Disconnect code The Continue Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk Continue Disconnect codes do not work if all receivers are busy A trunk can be set up to automatically tandem trunk forward to an outside...

Страница 747: ... 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Exten sion are Class 1 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect analog trunk only COS 01 15 1 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction COS 01 15 0 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Re striction for Tandem Trunkin...

Страница 748: ...Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction COS 01 15 0 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Re striction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up COS 01 15 0 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Monitor COS 01 15 0 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone 1800 seconds 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trun...

Страница 749: ...n Time 61 305ms Method D Tandem Trunking to Speed Dial Number Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 10 06 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line 733 11 10 07 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line 734 11 10 08 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the Destination for Au...

Страница 750: ...k Data Setup Continued Discontinued Trunk to Trunk Conversation 0 20 28 01 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Continue Code not assigned 20 28 02 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Discon nect Code not assigned 20 28 03 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Continue Time 0 seconds 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone 1800 seconds 24 02 10...

Страница 751: ...e set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in PRG 11 10 26 must be used by an extension other than the originating extension Method B Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk call 2 Press Hold key to place the first trunk call on hold 3 Place a second trunk call 4 Press Transfer key This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties The line keys...

Страница 752: ... trunk number PRG 11 10 26 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in PRG 11 10 26 Method D Automatic Tandem Trunking Using Speed Dialing To set Automatic Tandem Trunking 1 Dial service code 733 or the service code set for Set Automatic Transfer per Trunk 2 Dial the desired trunk number Trunk Number 001 084 3 Hang up The line key for the trunk is solid red as long as the Unsupervised Co...

Страница 753: ... Disconnect i e Press the line key or 9 plus the trunk number PRG 11 10 26 Continue Disconnect Codes To use the Continue code to extend a Tandem Trunk call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time PRG 24 02 07 a warning tone is heard and the user dials the Continue code PRG 20 28 01 to extend the con...

Страница 754: ...llowed from a Single Line Terminal until the PBR times out Virtual Extensions do not support Tone Override Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Waiting Camp On Data Line Security Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 12 03 Service Code Setup for Service Access Override Off Hook Sig...

Страница 755: ...tary Service Block Manual Off Hook Signaling COS 01 15 0 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On COS 01 15 0 20 18 06 Service Tone Timers Interval of Call Waiting Tone 10 seconds 80 01 01 39 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 255 0 Endless 80 01 02 39 Service Tone Setup Ring Busy Tone 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot Operation To send Off Hook signals to an ext...

Страница 756: ...y for each line is logged The total of incoming calls answer frequency call duration for each line and extension and abandon call frequency of each line is logged and the data is outputted to the PC The system totals the hour day week and month for each terminal and trunk number This information is used by the SMDR feature The extension which is totaled is determined by system programming The syst...

Страница 757: ...rt Data Setup All Line Busy Output 0 90 20 04 Traffic Report Data Setup DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0 90 20 05 Traffic Report Data Setup Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0 90 20 06 Traffic Report Data Setup Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0 90 20 07 Traffic Report Data Setup Voice Mail Channel All Busy Out put 0 90 20 09 Traffic Report Data Setup Attendant Channel All Busy Out put 0 90 20 10 Traffic Re...

Страница 758: ...up Each method has advantages Automatic On Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier However users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold Without Automatic On Hook Transfer extending a call becomes a two step operation but separate from placing calls on Hold Prevent Recall of Transferred Call The Class of Service program has an option that allows you to prevent a Transfer...

Страница 759: ...sfer Recall Time the call recalls the transferring extension With Transfer to Busy Extensions disabled PRG 24 02 02 0 you must also set PRG 20 09 07 for the extensions COS to 0 to disable call queuing and PRG 20 13 06 to set Automatic Off hook Signaling to manual An existing call can be transferred into a conference call Meet Me Paging Transfer allows the user to page a co worker and have the call...

Страница 760: ... Related Features Barge In Call Waiting Camp On Caller ID Call Forwarding Conference Meet Me Paging Transfer One Touch Calling Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Serial Call Guide to Feature Programming Program Num ber Program Name Default 11 12 58 Service Code Setup for Service Access Transfer into Conference 624 11 15 09 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Transfer to Incoming Ring Gr...

Страница 761: ...ass of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate COS 01 15 0 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive COS 01 15 0 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone COS 01 15 1 20 13 32 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Deny Multiple Barge Ins COS 01 15 0 20 14 11 Class of Service Options For DISA ...

Страница 762: ... to which it had been transferred 3 Announce the call and press the Transfer key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 06 or hang up If you do not have Automatic On Hook Transfer you must press your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call If your co worker does not want the call press the flashing line key to return to the call Single Line Terminal users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash I...

Страница 763: ...n a call press the Transfer key and dial service code defined in PRG 11 12 58 The display shows Transfer to Conf ICM Dial 2 Enter the extension number of the co worker currently on a Conference call to which the call should be transferred To cancel the transfer press the flashing line key to retrieve the call If an error tone is heard Barge In is disable for the extension and the call does not go ...

Страница 764: ...Tranferring an Intercom or Trunk Call using a DSS One Touch Key 1 While on a call press the DSS One Touch key 2 Announce the call or hang up SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 752 Transfer T ...

Страница 765: ...available Trunk Groups and 25 Routes OCC Moderately Expensive WATS Least Expensive DDD Most Expensive Outbound Call First Choice Second Choice Third Choice Conditions DISA PRG 25 10 have separate Trunk Group Routing programs The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming PRG 14 06 when setting up Ringing Line Preference Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks wit...

Страница 766: ... type 3 trunk access code 0 Not Assigned 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access Code 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 F Route Access 9 Dial Extension Analyze Refer to the programming manual for the default values of all tables 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Use this program to assign the trunk access code defined in PRG 11 01 01 This is the access code that users will dial to make ...

Страница 767: ...1 01 01 This is the access code that users will dial to make outbound calls on a different trunk group that the primary trunk group access code Maximum of 4 digits 0 9 default 9 14 05 01 Trunk Group Setup Assign all used trunks to valid trunk groups If trunk group 1 is used remove all unused trunks out of this trunk group Trunk group routing will not be able to access trunks that are assigned to t...

Страница 768: ...3 Dial number OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press the Trunk Group Routing key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 05 2 Dial the number SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 756 Trunk Group Routing T ...

Страница 769: ...he system can route the call to a trunk group All DID trunks of the same type should be placed in the same trunk group These trunk groups must then be assigned to a DID Translation Table Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming Default Settings All trunks are in group 1 System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialing Speed...

Страница 770: ...ess Map for Extensions 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to Programming Manual 20 02 02 System Options for Multiline Telephones Trunk Group Access Key Operating Mode 0 20 29 01 Timer Class for Extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class Number 0 20 31 04 Timer Class Timer Assignment Intercom Interdigits Time Intercom I D Timer 10 seconds 21 01 02 System Options for Outgoing Calls In tercom Interd...

Страница 771: ...or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group When a trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions With Automatic Route Selection ARS Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route A user can camp on or leave a callback request for an extension Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a call is placed Check...

Страница 772: ...ss Timer Assignment Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time 15 seconds 20 31 02 Timer Class Timer Assignment Callback Trunk Queu ing Cancel Time 64800 seconds Operation To queue for a busy trunk 1 Try to access the busy trunk 2 Dial 750 or press the Trunk Queuing Camp On key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 35 3 Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request OR Wait Off Hook to Camp On to the trunk To answer when Trunk...

Страница 773: ...cast Packet When phones are set to receive Unicast packets the VoIPDB will send a separate RTP stream to each phone that is set to receive the page E g If there are five IP Terminals in the page group and they are all set to Unicast Page Mode the VoIPDB will send five separate RTP streams utilizing five DSP resources When the phones are set to receive Multicast packets the VoIPDB will send one RTP...

Страница 774: ...0 It should be noted that many routing devices available do not support multicast within the range of 224 0 0 0 24 and may require the default address to be changed in the SL1100 VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection Three additional VoIPDB DSP resource assignments are available The assignments are Common without Unicast Paging Multicast Paging and Unicast Paging The assignments assist with keeping IP Ter...

Страница 775: ...al must have a gateway programmed to accomplish the multicast transmission When an actual gateway device does not exist on the network a dummy gateway address on the same subnet must be defined When utilizing Multicast mode and a page group consists of all IP Terminals the page is sent via a multicast message from the initiating phone If a paging group has IP and TDM Terminals when an IP Terminal ...

Страница 776: ...signment Internal Paging Group Number 0 for IP Station 1 for TDM Station Port 1 16 1 Group Port 17 0 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Pag ing Receiving 0 Off 1 On All Stations 0 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters 01 Group 1 02 Group 2 32 Group 32 31 07 01 Combined Paging Assignments 1 Operation To make an Internal Page ...

Страница 777: ...s 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 32 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Make announcement 4 Hang up ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 765 U ...

Страница 778: ...les through the idle members of a UCD Department Calling group The call continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up However if the next station in the cycle is busy when a new call comes in the call queues to the busy agent New calls do not hunt past a busy agent Busy or Not Answered A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a UCD Department Calling gr...

Страница 779: ...ty 2 Priority 3 CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Figure 1 57 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 767 U ...

Страница 780: ...CALL 4 Figure 1 58 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s PZ VM21 and VRS Compact Flash for Delay Announcements SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 768 Uniform Call Distribution UCD U ...

Страница 781: ...tment Group Basic Data Setup Call Recall Restric tion for STG 0 16 01 09 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Hunt ing No Answer Time 15 seconds 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Enhanced Hunt Type 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Refer to Programming Manual 16 03 01 Secondary Department Group not assigned 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Extension 101...

Страница 782: ...ll to the first free telephone in the UCD group department To log out of your UCD Depatment Calling Group While you are logged out UCD Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 650 and 1 OR Press the Uniform Call Distribution Log In key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 46 The key lights while you are logged out To log back in to your UCD Department Calling Group While y...

Страница 783: ...k and have entered the service code when programming any function Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Clock Calendar Display Time and Date Code Restriction Toll Restriction One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and...

Страница 784: ...rtual Extension appearing on another station Voice and MW softkeys appear in the display of the calling station but they do not operate When talking on a Virtual Extension you cannot mute the handset Incoming calls to a virtual extension that appear on stations that are used with the CTI applications PC Assistant or PC Attendant do not show up as a second call in the CTI application Calls on Virtu...

Страница 785: ...a virtual that is call forwarded off premise will always follow ARS Class 1 routing properties Version 2 0 or higher software supports distinctive ring tones for external calls or intercom calls from specified extensions Ringtone mode for incoming to Virtual Extension PRG 20 04 05 is On is followed by PRG 22 03 01 and PRG 15 02 02 for External calls and PRG 15 08 01 and PRG 15 02 02 for Intercom c...

Страница 786: ...attern 6 DR300 Melody 3 DR700 7 Tone Pattern 7 DR300 Melody 4 DR700 8 Tone Pattern 2 DR300 Melody 5 DR700 default 8 V2 0 Added 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys This program is used on a per station basis to assign different function keys to the Multiline Terminals Function key 03 is used to assign a virtual extension to a Multiline Terminal 03 Virtual Extension Refer to the programming manual f...

Страница 787: ... name is to be sent If the setting data is set to a 0 secondary ex tension name and a call is made from the virtu al extension the name programmed in PRG 15 01 01 for the virtual extension is presented If the setting data is set to a 1 actual station name and a call is made from the virtual the extension name of the Multiline Terminal that the virtual is on is presented 0 Secondary Extension Name ...

Страница 788: ...nk access code to seize an outside line and place your call To program a Virtual Extension key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold key once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight ...

Страница 789: ...to the user s or a co worker s mailbox After the Transfer goes through the caller can leave a message in the mailbox Voice Mail Queuing When accessing the voice mail the system provides a voice mail queue If all the voice mail ports are busy any calls trying to get to the voice mail are placed in queue As the voice mail ports become available the calls are connected to the voice mail in the order ...

Страница 790: ...User is transferring a call to VM Record a message to be placed in mail box of extension YYY Up to four digits Default not as signed Record Message for Called Extension QVM Record a message to be placed in mail box of extension YYY Store source exten sion number XXX for automatic reply feature 45 04 04 For ward All 3UUUZZZ Up to four digits UUUZZZ Up to four digits ZZZ Forward All Extension or Tru...

Страница 791: ...d for Voice Response System VRS Ring Group calls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail Only one Voice Mail system can be installed in an SL1100 system Analog or Digital but not both in same system This restriction is because only one Department Group can be assigned for Voice Mail If installing an Analog Voice Mail System any Analog station port SLT port can be assigned to support ...

Страница 792: ...for Called Extension 2 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Mes sage Wait Lamp Color 1 15 02 38 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Mes sage Wait Lamp Cycle 2 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type 0 15 03 09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Function For Exter...

Страница 793: ... with Follow Me COS 01 15 1 20 11 12 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Off Premise External Call Forwarding COS 01 15 1 20 13 01 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Alarm COS 01 15 0 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming COS 01 15 0 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service L...

Страница 794: ... Voice Mail Integration Options Trunk Number Mapping 2 45 04 01 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Remote Logon Inter nal not assigned 45 04 02 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Direct Logon not assigned 45 04 03 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Transfer Message not assigned 45 04 04 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Forward All not assigned 45 04 05 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Forward Busy not assign...

Страница 795: ... Level Type 1 DT 0 25dBm Type 2 BT 0 25dBm Type 3 RBT 0 25dBm Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 02 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Min Detection Lev el 0 15 Type 1 DT 15 25dBm Type 2 BT 15 25dBm Type 3 RBT 15 25dBm Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S N Ratio Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No Tone T...

Страница 796: ...ity code Normally your Message Waiting LED goes out if applicable If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General Message Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset and dial 8 If you are at a co worker s telephone you can dial the Voice Mail master number and your mailbox number instead You can also use this procedure from your own telephone to call a co worker ...

Страница 797: ...en pick the call back up You can restart and stop recording as required Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 654 The system automatically reconnects you to your call To stop recording hookflash twice You can restart and stop recording as required ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 785 V ...

Страница 798: ...ew message indication Also the Voice Mail key flashes green Voice Mail LED is a higher priority then any other status for the DSS BLF key The enabling or disabling of Voice Mail Indication on BLF enables the station with the message to show up on other telephones It does not enable disable stations from seeing the BLF indication Virtual Extension Keys assigned as code 03 do not support Voice Mail ...

Страница 799: ...IL V1 5 Added 30 05 07 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent Log In ACD DSS 4 IR V1 5 Added 30 05 09 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 1 Hotel DSS 7 On 30 05 10 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS 1 FL 30 05 11 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 3 Hotel DSS 2 WK 30 05 12 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 4 Hotel DSS 3 RW 30 05 13 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status ...

Страница 800: ...e extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold key 7 Press Speaker key To program a Voice Mail key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 751 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 77 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Speaker key SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 788 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys V ...

Страница 801: ...ecification Bit Rate 64 kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 kHz Audio Format CCiTT μ law Size 1 MB Length 2 Min To upload the WAV file to the system please refer to InMail Upload Download Audio on page 1 412 Conditions The feature basically work with Normal Trunk Incoming call PBX CES Incoming Call DID DISA VRS DID DDI and Dial In in the Tie Line The feature does not work for ...

Страница 802: ...inging terminal numbers are not related to the count of channels The Ringing priority is as follows CID Incoming Voice Melody Ring PRG13 04 07 CID Incoming Ring PRG13 04 05 Voice Melody ring for each extension PRG15 02 55 Normal Ring This feature can not be set from Navigation Key Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Digital Multiline Terminal Required Component s CF Card provid...

Страница 803: ...age Setting 778 Operation To Set the Incoming Voice Melody ringing from Service Code 1 Press Service Code 778 VRS INCOM RI 1 STA 2 This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 2 Press Enter 1 RI VRS INCOM CID This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 3 Enter the Caller ID Number You can clear the digits entered by pressing Exit key VRS INCOM CID 123 This display indica...

Страница 804: ...onitor Dial Up to 8 digits If you press Exit Key you can clear the digits you entered ABB0005 ModeX Target ModeX X is Mode 1 3 13 04 03 This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 8 Press Hold and you enter the Incoming Ring Pattern 13 04 05 0 9 can be entered and 0 9 are followings 0 Normal pattern 1 4 Tone pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale pattern 1 5 ABB0005 ModeX Ring 0 9 1 ModeX X is Mode 1...

Страница 805: ... IP and Multiline Terminals 2 Press Enter 1 RI VRS INCOM CID This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 3 Enter the Caller ID Number You can clear the digits entered by pressing Exit key VRS INCOM CID 123 This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 4 Press Hold ABB 0005 123 This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 5 Press Hold You can set Name PRG 13 0...

Страница 806: ...l TRF2 IRG TRG3 Remote Monitor ABB0005 TRF Mode 0 3 0 This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 7 Press 0 and RI Set will be canceled Set ABB Cancel RI This display indication is for IP and Multiline Terminals 8 Press Speaker SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 794 Voice Melody Ringing by VM V ...

Страница 807: ... on a CPU Refer to the Conference feature for Conference circuit programming Voice Over can interrupt a trunk call only if the trunk is set up for at least six seconds Do not use Voice Over to a user on Speaker phone as the conversation may be heard by the outside party When a Multiline Terminal user performs Voice Over the speech path is 1 way from the originator to the destination The Voice Over...

Страница 808: ...he conversation may be heard by the outside party Answering a Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed Voice Over key Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Multiline and Single Line Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Conference Off Hook Signaling Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Default 11 12 41 Service Code Se...

Страница 809: ...o a Voice Over alert tone to your extension You can respond only if you have a Voice Over key 1 Press the Voice Over key The Voice Over key lights steadily green and you can talk to the interrupting party To return to your original call 1 Press the Voice Over key 2 Press the Voice Over key again Your Voice Over key flashes red when you are talking to your original call To switch between your origi...

Страница 810: ...nd do not require battery back up Any on premise extension caller can listen record and erase VRS Messages unless restricted in programming DISA and DID callers can listen and record VRS messages unless restricted in programming General Message A General Message is a prerecorded message available to all callers A General Message typically contains important company information that all employees s...

Страница 811: ...tension to become free Automatic Overflow Automatic Overflow can automatically redirect a call if it cannot go through This can happen if all VRS ports are busy if the called extension does not answer or if the caller misdials or waits too long to dial This occurs if the caller is using a dial pulse telephone When the call overflows it rings a designated Ring Group or the Voice Mail system Program...

Страница 812: ...53 Function Key 53 can be used to play the VRS Waiting Message immediately when Function Key 53 the ringing Trunk Appearance Key are pressed 20 07 13 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Record VRS Msg Operation 20 15 11 Ring Cycle Setup VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time 22 01 08 System Options for Incoming Calls DID ...

Страница 813: ...es 8 for Time Date Conditions VRS record time is fixed at two minutes and cannot be changed The Automated Attendant VRS can answer up to 16 calls Needs License and MEMDB simultaneously The maximum number of VRS ports is 16 when the MEMDB is installed on the CPU If the MEMDB is not installed the maximum number of VRS ports is four Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals None Require...

Страница 814: ...s 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No oth er extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 14 01 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Waiting Message Start Time 0 seconds 22 14 02 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Waiting Message Number 0 22 14 03 VRS Delayed Message for IRG...

Страница 815: ...SA Transfer Target Setup DISA Transfer Target Area at NoAnswer or Busy Default 999 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number Port 1 16 1 Group 1 Port 17 0 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Pag ing Receiving All stations 0 31 04 01 External Paging Zone Group Paging Group Number Speaker 1 Basic 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 Expansion 1 2 Group 2 Speaker 3...

Страница 816: ...nt to listen 01 100 You hear the previously recorded message If you hear a beep instead no previous message is recorded 5 Press to hear the message again OR To hear another message dial 5 and then enter the message number 01 100 OR Hang up To erase a previously recorded VRS message 1 Press Speaker key or lift the handset OR At a Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 616 3 Dial 3 Erase 4 Dia...

Страница 817: ...1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial 611 You hear the General Message Normally your Message Waiting LED goes out If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox To record listen to or erase the General Message 1 Press Speaker key or lift the handset OR At Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 612 3 Dial the fu...

Страница 818: ...me and date from any Multiline Terminal extension 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial 8 for time and date Preamble To answer a Preamble call 1 Answer the ringing call The line key turns solid red as the system plays the preamble to the caller 2 When you hear two beeps and the line key turns green converse with the caller SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 1 806 Voice Response System VRS V ...

Страница 819: ...t recorded in the proper format may not playback on the VRS CFVM CompactFlash The proper format is Bit Rate 64kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCiTT A law μ law User Pro Access There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes to audio files on the InMail VRS CF but only one allows changes to be made to VRS messages To login open an Internet...

Страница 820: ...nd the message was left The table below shows how to interpret the message name to determine this information Table 1 72 Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits or VRS for the VRS message T Message Type Greeting or VRS message Recorded message NNN Message number three digits YYYY Year MM Month 1 12 DD Date...

Страница 821: ...ormat it may not playback properly When a mailbox has a new message and the message is deleted using the User Pro interface the MWI of the mailbox will NOT be cancelled The largest allowed upload file size is approximately 1MB Files larger than this cannot be uploaded There is no size limitation when downloading audio files User Pro does not check the uploaded file for correct naming format i e BT...

Страница 822: ...sion When the mailbox is being used by another session either PC or tel ephone There is no available space in the CF When there is no available space in the CF The file is being used by another session Please try again later When the file to be downloaded is being used by another session ei ther PC or telephone The selected file has already been deleted When the file selected for download has alre...

Страница 823: ...8 0 10 2 At the login screen enter username USER1 and password 1111 3 You will then see the main menu click on the VRS Audio Up Download icon 4 There can be up to 100 VRS messages and you may need to scroll through several pages or jump to get to the desired message number The message numbers correspond to the same message number when accessed via the telephone Message 1 is 001 message 2 is 002 an...

Страница 824: ... system broadcasts the second message John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call If John doesn t pick up the call the Page periodically repeats VRS Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls immediately rerouted This means that Park and Page activates for ringing Intercom calls DID calls and DISA calls It also activates for calls transferred from the Auto...

Страница 825: ...Exten sion are Class 1 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number Port 1 16 1 Group 1 Port 17 0 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters 01 Group 1 02 Group 2 32 Group 32 31 04 01 External Paging Zone Group Paging Group Number Speaker 1 Basic 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 Expansion 1 2 Group 2 Speaker 3 Expansion 2 3 Group 3 31 06 01 ...

Страница 826: ...ouncement is complete A paging chime overrides the first four seconds of an announcement Allow a delay in announcement recording for chime time 5 Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement For example for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 01 or for Combined Paging Zone 1 dial 1 1 6 Dial the Park and Page type 2 All Calls 3 Outside Calls Only 7 Press Speaker key to hang up or go on hook at t...

Страница 827: ...an not be changed when BGM is enable or when Navigation Mode PRG 15 02 60 is enable When Navigation is enabled Contrast can be changed by using a Navigation mode Multiline Terminal users can further increase station ring volume by pressing Speaker key and dialing Code 729 Headset volume off hook ringing volume station ringing volume and Speaker volume adjustments are determined by PRG 15 02 27 The...

Страница 828: ...al 729 If the telephone is ringing skip to step 2 2 Press the VOLUME or key To adjust the volume of ringing incoming Paging announcements Handsfree the handset or Background Music If the user is using a Navigation While receiving the call Up and Down Cursor keys will not adjust the Volume 1 Press the VOLUME or key The feature must be active to change the volume Pressing the volume keys when the te...

Страница 829: ...abled the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off premise using an outside trunk the warning tone timer begins immediately This occurs only if either trunk involved in the call is programmed for this feature PRG 14 01 17 When transferring...

Страница 830: ...Code not assigned 20 28 02 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Disconnect Code not assigned 20 28 03 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Continue Time 0 second 21 01 01 System Options for Outgoing Calls Seizure Trunk Line Mode 0 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External 5 seconds 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Warning Tone Time 3600 ...

Страница 831: ...program this code through PRG 15 07 or by dialing Service Code 751 or 752 Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information SECTION 3 USING HANDSFREE The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree This lets a user just press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call For extensions without Automatic Handsfree the user must Lift the handset or press Speaker ke...

Страница 832: ...an exten sion in your pickup group ex cept Ring Group calls Group Call Pickup 24 0 Answer a Message Waiting re quest Message Waiting 38 733 Set the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line Transfer 734 Cancel the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line Transfer 735 Set the Destination for Automat ic Trunk Transfer Transfer 1 Paging Group Number Make a Combined Page Paging 0 Cancel Call Forwarding Cal...

Страница 833: ...inging 4 On Hook Listen to the General Message Voice Response System VRS 6 On Hook Check an extension number Voice Response System VRS 8 On Hook Listen for the time Voice Response System VRS 9 Place a call using ARS or Trunk Group Routing Automatic Route Selection Trunk Group Routing 02 600 code 0 Use Dial Block Toll Restriction Dial Block 601 code 0 Aa a supervisor use Dial Block Toll Restriction...

Страница 834: ...phone Hotel Motel Do Not Disturb 630 Cancel DND at another room tel ephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 631 Set up a Wake Up call for your own room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 632 Cancel a Wake Up Call for your room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 633 Set a Wake Up Call for another guest room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 634 Cancel a Wake Up Call for an other guest room telephone Hotel...

Страница 835: ...ribution ACD V1 5 Added 668 Log an agent out of their ACD Group Automatic Call Distribution ACD V1 5 Added 669 Are a supervisor assigning an agent into another ACD Group or changing an agent s status Automatic Call Distribution ACD V1 5 Added 670 ACD Group Change your ACD Group as signment Automatic Call Distribution ACD V1 5 Added 663 6 digit code line telephone num ber Override Toll Restriction ...

Страница 836: ...ate Night 1 Mode Activate Midnight 1 Mode Activate Rest 1 Mode Activate Day 2 Mode Activate Night 2 Mode Activate Midnight 2 Mode Activate Rest 2 Mode Night Service 09 1 09 2 09 3 09 4 09 5 09 6 09 7 09 8 720 1 ICM or 2 TRK tone 1 8 Change your extension incoming ring tones Selectable Ring Tones 721 Enable Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringin...

Страница 837: ...from Exclusive Hold at a SLT Hold 760 Use DID ACD Access Code Automatic Call Distribution ACD V1 5 Added 762 Pick up a call from Group Hold Hold 763 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone if your extension is in the group called Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging 23 or 32 764 zone paged 0 32 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the grou...

Страница 838: ...rvice Codes by Feature For this fea ture Dial this Service Code 1 When you Also see Function Key Note 1 Except where indicated dial Service Code from intercom dial tone e g press idle Speaker key first Speed Dialing 753 bin number Hold Name Hold to store Store System Speed Dialing num bers 754 bin number Hold Name Hold to store Store Group Speed Dialing num bers 2 bin Dial a System Speed Dialing n...

Страница 839: ...Forwarding Both Ringing 742 Set Cancel Call Forwarding when Busy 744 Set Cancel Call Forwarding when Busy No Answer 743 Set Cancel Call Forwarding No An swer 746 Set Cancel Call Forwarding Follow Me 741 Set Cancel Call Forwarding Immedi ate Call Forwarding Off Premise Door Box 722 Call off premise with a Door Box 54 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Over ride 707 Override an extension Call Forward or...

Страница 840: ...firma tion Tone 724 Enable disable Dial Pad Confirma tion Tone Directed Call Pick up ext Pick up a call ringing or waiting at an extension Do Not Disturb 747 0 Cancel 1 Trk calls 2 Paging ICM Call Forwards and Transfers 3 All calls 4 Call Forwards Activate Do Not Disturb Door Box 702 Door Box 1 6 Place a call to a door Box 722 Forward a Door Box off premise E911 786 Turn off the E911 alarm Flash 3...

Страница 841: ...om telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 633 Set a Wake Up Call for another guest room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 634 Cancel a wake Up Call for another guest room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 635 Enable Room to Room Call Restric tion for a guest room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 636 Disable Room to Room Call Restric tion for a guest room Hotel Mot...

Страница 842: ...Switching for other group 718 1 718 2 718 3 718 4 718 5 718 6 718 7 718 8 Activate Day 1 Mode Activate Night 1 Mode Activate Midnight 1 Mode Activate Rest 1 Mode Activate Day 2 Mode Activate Night 2 Mode Activate Midnight 2 Mode Activate Rest 2 Mode 09 1 09 2 09 3 09 4 09 5 09 6 09 7 09 8 Off Hook Signaling Off Hook or 709 Send off hook signal tones to a busy extension 33 One Touch Dialing 755 One...

Страница 843: ...ction Enter system programming mode Station Message Detail Recording 621 Print the SMDR Extension Accumu lated printout 622 Print the SMDR Group Accumulated printout 623 Print the SMDR Account Code Ac cumulated printout Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference 8 Set up an Unsupervised Confer ence Time and Date Clock Calendar Display 728 hour minutes Set the system Time Toll Restriction Di al Block ...

Страница 844: ...p 606 Group number 1 8 or 01 32 Cancel Delayed Transfer 607 Group number 1 8 or 01 32 Set up DND for each extension group 608 Group number 1 8 or 01 32 Cancel DND for each extension group 624 Extension number Transfer a call into an existing call 782 Transfer a call to the VRS This can be used also to route ANI DNIS to the VRS Trunk Group Rout ing or Automatic Route Selection 9 Place a call using ...

Страница 845: ... erase a VRS Message 750 Camp On to an extension when call ing into the system through the VRS 782 Transfer a call to the VRS This can be used also to route ANI DNIS to the VRS Volume Control 729 Check or change ring volume Common Cancel ing Service Code 9 Use Common Canceling Service Code Function Key Codes by Feature Table 2 4 Function Key Codes by Feature To program a key press Speaker key dial...

Страница 846: ... Arrival CAR Key Code 03 ext Operation Press key Place or answer a call to your co worker s extension Slow Flash red when ringing On red when busy Call For warding Both Ring Code 14 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Forward Both Ring to extension Slowly flashes red 745 Call For warding Busy Code 11 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Forward Busy to extension or Voice Mail Slowly flashes...

Страница 847: ...Group On when removed Off when installed 650 Department Step Calling Code 36 Operation Dial busy ext Press key Step Call through a Department Group for an idle member None 2 Direct Sta tion Selec tion One Touch Call ing Code 01 Operation Press key dest ext or outside tel Hold Call an extension or outside number using a DSS key Off extension idle On extension busy Flashing DND Do Not Dis turb Code ...

Страница 848: ... your virtual phan tom extension Slow Flash red when ringing On red when busy Name Stor ing Code 55 Operation Press key ext name Hold Enter a name for the extension to be dis played on telephones None 700 Night Serv ice Code 09 mode 1 4 or 1 8 Operation Press key Activate the Day Night Mode On red when activa ted 718 0 Off Hook Signaling Code 33 Operation Call ext and receive busy Press key Signal...

Страница 849: ... Per sonal Greeting Flashes red when ac tivated Serial Call Code 43 Operation Trk call Hold Ext Press key Place a Serial Call to a co worker None Step Call Code 36 Operation Press key Step through a de partment group None 2 Transfer Code 06 Operation Establish call Hold Ext Press key Transfer a call None Trunk Group Routing Code 05 Operation Press key Access a trunk using Trunk Group Routing On re...

Страница 850: ...Operation Set up call Press key set up call to add Press key twice Conference Set up a conference or a Meet Me Con ference On red during setup 1 Code 08 Operation Press key Incoming Caller ID List List incoming caller ID to extension Flashing when new log created On in call log Code 09 mode 1 4 or 1 8 Operation Press key Night Service Activate the Day Night Mode On red when activated 718 mode 1 4 ...

Страница 851: ...eration Speaker key Press Key Group Call Pickup Answer a call ring ing another tele phone in your Pick up Group None Code 25 Operation Speaker key Press key Group Call Pickup Answer a call ring ing a telephone in another Pickup Group if you do not know the group number None 769 Code 26 Pickup Group 1 32 Operation Speaker key Press key Pick up Group Group Call Pickup Answer a call ring ing a teleph...

Страница 852: ... activated 750 Code 36 Operation Dial busy ext Press key pswd 0000 place outside call Department Step Calling Step Call through a Department Group for an idle member None 708 Code 37 Operation Call extension Press key Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Override an exten sion Call Forward ing or Do Not Dis turb On red when activated 707 Code 38 Operation Leave message Call ext Press key OR Ans...

Страница 853: ... activated Flashes when in DND Call Forward Code 50 Operation Press key Account Codes Enter Account Co des None or Code 55 Operation Do not Lift the handset Press key Enter extension number Enter name Press Hold Name Storing Change the name displayed on your display telephone None 700 Code 83 0 4 Operation Press key Voice Mail Use Voice Mail Service Flashes slowly when monitoring Code 77 exten sio...

Страница 854: ...Monitoring On when set not assigned Code 94 Call Attendant key Operation Press key Call Attendant Use Call Attendant Fast flash when setup for No answer calls Twice blink when set up for Busy calls On when setup for Busy No answer calls Busy 696 No Answer 697 Code 97 Door phone 1 6 Operation Press key Doorphone Use Doorphone ac cess On when Doorphone Busy Fast flash when Door phone Incoming 702 Co...

Страница 855: ...06 Net work number 1 5 Operation Press key Networking Access a networked trunk None V1 5 Added Code 10 Operation Press key to log in Press key 1 to log out or 0 to can cel Automatic Call Dis tribution ACD Basic Operation Log in or out of an ACD Group On red when logged in Off when logged out 5 V1 5 Added Code 13 Operation Press key Automatic Call Dis tribution ACD Rest Mode Enable disable Rest Mod...

Страница 856: ...MEMO SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 2 26 Codes Tables ...

Страница 857: ...erified S S S Account Code Entry S S S Alarm S S S Alarm Reports S S E Alphanumeric Display S S S Analog Communications Interface ACI S S S Ancillary Device Connection S S S Answer Hold Automatic Hold S S S Attendant Call Queuing S S S Automatic Call Distribution ACD N A S S Automatic Release S S S Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route S S S Background Music S S S Barge In S S S Battery Backup Sys...

Страница 858: ...ed Dialing S S S Cordless DECT Telephone S S S Data Line Security S S S Delayed Ringing S S S Department Calling S S S Department Step Calling S S S DHCP Client S S S Dial Pad Confirmation Tone S S S Dial Tone Detection S S S Dialing Number Preview S S S Digital Trunk Clocking S S S Direct Inward Dialing DID S S E Direct Inward Line DIL S S S Direct Inward System Access DISA S S S Direct Station S...

Страница 859: ...Hotel Motel Wake Up Call S S S Hot Key Pad S S S Hotline S S S Howler Tone Service S S S Illuminated Dial Pad S S S InMail S S S InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID S S S InMail Cascade Message Notification S S E InMail Email Notification S S S InMail Find Me Follow Me S S E InMail Language Setting S S S InMail Park and Page S S S InMail Upload Download Audio S S S Intercom S S E IP Multili...

Страница 860: ...ibility Behind PBX S S S PC Programming S S S PC Programming Intuition Setup S S S Power Failure Transfer S S S Prime Line Selection S S S Private Line S S S Programmable Function Keys S S S Programming from a Multiline Terminal S S S Pulse to Tone Conversion S S S Redial Function S S S Remote System Upgrade S S S Repeat Redial S S S Resident System Program S S S Reverse Voice Over S S S Ring Grou...

Страница 861: ...ference S S S Tone Override S S S Traffic Reports S S S Transfer S S S Trunk Group Routing S S S Trunk Groups S S S Trunk Queuing Camp On S S S Unicast Multicast Paging Mode S S S Uniform Call Distribution UCD S S S User Programming Ability S S S Virtual Extensions S S E Voice Mail Integration Analog S S S Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys S S S Voice Melody Ringing by VM S S S Voice Over...

Страница 862: ...MEMO SL1100 ISSUE 2 0 3 6 Features Availability by Software Revision ...

Страница 863: ...MEMO ISSUE 2 0 SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual 3 7 ...

Страница 864: ...Features and Specifications Manual NEC Corporation ISSUE 2 0 ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды